JP2020162967A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve an amusement of a performance.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 determines a mode of identification information (first performance pattern z1) which is stop displayed in a pseudo state in a pseudo variation according to a result of a special pattern pattern determination based on special pattern 2 game information. According to the mode of the identification information stop displayed in the pseudo state, the result of the special pattern pattern determination based on the special pattern 2 game information can be suggested. Especially, by the mode of the identification information stop displayed in the pseudo state, at least a game state (normal pattern high probability state or normal pattern low probability state) after finish of the specific game state (jackpot game state) can be suggested.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 50

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a pseudo stop display of identification information is executed during a variable display of identification information.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a pseudo stop display of identification information is executed during variable display of identification information (see Patent Document 1).
In this game machine, as the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, a plurality of variation patterns in which the number of times of the pseudo-ream to be executed is different are defined. Then, as the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed increases, the probability of becoming a "big hit" increases, and the probability that the reach display mode appears also increases.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-195873

However, with a conventional game machine, there is a risk that the interest of the production will be reduced.
That is, in the conventional game machine, the probability of becoming a "big hit" or the like is suggested by the number of pseudo-reams executed. Therefore, the player pays particular attention to the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, and as a result, the attention to the production content of the pseudo-ream at each time may be reduced, and the interest of the production may be reduced. ..
An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of production.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the first invention has a display control means for executing variable display of identification information and stop display of identification information according to the result of the pass / fail determination, and a pass / fail determination. The display control means includes a specific game state control means that causes a specific game state according to the result of the winning type determination when the result of the above is a specific result, and the display control means identifies the information during the variable display of the identification information. It is possible to execute a pseudo stop display of information, and the mode of the identification information to be pseudo stop displayed is determined according to the result of the winning type determination.
In the gaming machine according to the first invention, the mode of the identification information that is pseudo-stopped and displayed is determined according to the result of the winning type determination.
Thereby, the result of the winning type determination can be suggested by the mode of the identification information that is displayed in a pseudo-stop manner.
Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the mode of the identification information that is pseudo-stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the production.
Here, as the hit / fail judgment, the special figure hit judgment described later corresponds. The identification information corresponds to the first effect symbol z1 described later. As the display control means, the effect control board 300 described later corresponds. As the specific result, "big hit" or "small hit" described later corresponds. As the winning type judgment, the special symbol judgment described later corresponds. The specific gaming state corresponds to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state described later. The main control board 200, which will be described later, corresponds to the specific game state control means. As the pseudo stop display of the identification information, the temporary stop display of the first effect symbol in the "pseudo fluctuation" described later corresponds.

The gaming machine according to the second invention is characterized in that, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, at least the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state is suggested by the mode of the identification information that is pseudo-stopped and displayed. And.
In the gaming machine according to the second invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the production.
Here, as the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state, the normal figure high probability state (state in which the time saving control is being executed) or the normal figure low probability state (state in which the time saving control is stopped), which will be described later, corresponds.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the production.

It is a perspective view which shows the whole structure of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the front of the game board, and schematically showed the part necessary for explanation. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the launch condition detection circuit and the launch control circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an effect control board. This is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210. It is a flowchart which shows the CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main loop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the evacuation processing at the time of power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the dynamic port output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display device output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting-related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the switch management process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure start ball detection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the special game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during stop of a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big prize opening opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize opening opening control process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big prize opening closure effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big prize opening opening end weight processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize opening opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize opening opening control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big prize opening closure effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big winning opening opening end weight processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during stop of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory opening control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory closing effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory opening end weight processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the subtimer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening command reception process. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the 2nd special symbol lottery. It is a figure which shows the variable part which constitutes the first half block. It is a figure which shows the production composition of the latter half block.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the present embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of the pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, an integrated door unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3, and the integrated door unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. As a result, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Further, the integrated door unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.

The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (outer frame). Then, the outer frame included in the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement park.
The inner frame unit 3 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is arranged inside the outer frame unit 2.
The integrated door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape. The integrated door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a arranged at a substantially central portion, a decorative portion 4b arranged around the transparent plate 4a, a saucer unit 5 arranged under the transparent plate 4a, and the like. It has a firing handle unit 6 arranged on the side of the saucer unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape by a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is formed of a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that bulges forward. Each corner on the upper side of the decorative portion 4b is provided with a sound extraction portion 4c in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. Each sound extraction unit 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output by the speaker 22 passes. Further, a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 is configured to include a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The saucer unit 5 includes a saucer 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls) and various operating means that can be operated by the player.
In the present embodiment, as various operation means, there are an effect button 5b, a rotary selector 5c, a light amount adjustment button (not shown), a volume adjustment button (not shown), a cross key button (not shown), and the like. ing.
The effect button 5b includes an operation unit that can be pressed by the player, and a button switch 25 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing operation of the operation unit. The button switch 25 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the operation unit is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called “jog dial”) includes an operation unit that can be rotated by a player and a dial switch 26 (see FIG. 3) that detects the rotation operation of the operation unit. The dial switch 26 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the operation unit is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 [°]).

The light amount adjustment button consists of two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) that can be pressed by the player, and a light amount adjustment switch 27 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit. And are configured to include. The light amount adjusting switch 27 outputs the first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the first operation unit is pressed, and the second operation unit is pressed each time the second operation unit is pressed. Is output to the effect control board 300.
The volume adjustment button consists of two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) that can be pressed by the player, and a volume adjustment switch 28 that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit (see FIG. 3). And are configured to include. The volume control switch 28 outputs the first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the first operation unit is pressed, and the second operation unit is pressed each time the second operation unit is pressed. Is output to the effect control board 300.
The cross key button consists of four operation units (up key button, down key button, left key button, and right key button) that can be pressed by the player, and a cross key switch that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit. 29 (see FIG. 3) and 29 (see FIG. 3). The cross key switch 29 outputs a first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the upper key button is pressed, and outputs a second detection signal each time the lower key button is pressed. Output to the effect control board 300, each time the left key button is pressed, a third detection signal is output to the effect control board 300, and each time the right key button is pressed, the fourth Is output to the effect control board 300.

Further, a lending operation unit 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the saucer unit 5. The lending operation unit 7 has a ball lending button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to the CR unit 700 capable of reading and updating the information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when the prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 700, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 700 is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated with the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 700, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the saucer 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the remaining frequency of the updated valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, if the return button 7b is operated with the prepaid card having the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit 700, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 700.
Here, as the prepaid cart, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, or the like is applicable.

The launch handle unit 6 includes a handle base portion (not shown), a handle operation portion (not shown), and a launch stop button (not shown).
The handle base portion is attached to the front side of the integrated door unit 4. A bearing portion is provided on the front side of the handle base portion.
The handle operation unit is configured so that it can be gripped by the player. A rotating shaft portion is provided on the back side of the handle operating portion. The handle operating portion is rotatably attached to the handle base portion by pivotally supporting the rotating shaft portion by the bearing portion of the handle base portion.
The handle operation unit can be rotated (displaced) between a predetermined initial position and a predetermined limit position. Inside the firing handle unit 6, a non-vibrating means (spring in the present embodiment) is arranged to displace the handle operating portion toward the initial position side. As a result, the handle operation unit is arranged (displaced) at the initial position when the rotation operation by the player is not performed.
The launch stop button is provided on the side surface side of the handle operation unit. The launch stop button can be pressed by the player.

Further, the launch handle unit 6 includes a launch volume 411, a touch sensor 412, and a launch stop switch 413.
The firing volume 411 is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 411 detects the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation unit (the angle at which the handle operation unit is rotated). Specifically, the firing volume 411 includes a rotation shaft and a resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation shaft. The rotation shaft of the firing volume 411 is coaxially fixed to the rotation shaft portion of the handle operating portion. As a result, the rotation shaft of the firing volume 411 is rotated according to the rotation operation of the handle operating portion, and the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the rotation operation amount of the handle operating portion.
The firing volume 411 is electrically connected to the operation detection unit 421 (see FIG. 4). The operation detection unit 421 detects the rotation operation (rotation operation amount) of the handle operation unit based on the change in the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411.
The touch sensor 412 detects contact (grasping) by the player with the steering wheel operating portion based on the change in capacitance. Then, the touch sensor 412 outputs a touch signal to the firing possible condition detection unit 422 (see FIG. 4) when the player's contact with the steering wheel operation unit is detected (touch signal is set to high level). To do). On the other hand, the touch sensor 412 stops the output of the touch signal to the launchable condition detection unit 422 (the touch signal is set to the low level) when the contact with the steering wheel operation unit by the player is not detected.
The launch stop switch 413 detects the pressing operation of the launch stop button. Then, the launch stop switch 413 outputs a launch stop signal to the launch enable condition detection unit 422 (the launch stop signal is set to a high level) when the pressing operation of the launch stop button is not detected. On the other hand, the launch stop switch 413 stops the output of the launch stop signal to the launchable condition detection unit 422 when the pressing operation of the launch stop button is detected (the launch stop signal is set to a low level).

(Structure of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front surface of the game board and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. As a result, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the integrated door unit 4. Then, the player can visually recognize the game board 11 (game area 30) described later through the transparent plate 4a. In the present embodiment, a game area 30 described later is configured between the back surface of the transparent plate 4a and the front surface of the game board 11.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set plate (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set plate, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, sub) attached to the set plate. An image display device 32, a movable body unit, etc.) are provided.

The set plate is formed in a box shape with the front side open. An opening formed of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set plate. The game board 11 is formed of a resin in a flat plate shape. An opening (not shown) formed of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the game board 11. Then, the player can visually recognize the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set plate.
Around the opening in the front surface of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which the game ball launched in response to the rotation operation of the launch handle unit 6 flows down. Then, in the game area 30, as a path through which the game ball flows down, a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured. There is.
Further, a board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the game area 30 of the game board 11. The board lamp 21 is configured to include a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
The main image display device 31 is configured to include a display screen 31a capable of displaying various effect images (moving images / still images).
On the display screen 31a, three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) on which the first effect symbol z1 (not shown) and a second effect symbol z2 (not shown) are displayed. It is possible to configure one second effect symbol display area a4 (not shown).
The first effect symbol z1 is configured to include identification information (design) such as numbers, characters, symbols, and characters. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the first effect symbol z1.
In the present embodiment, each first effect symbol z1 is configured to include any of the identification information of "1" to "7". That is, as the first effect symbol z1 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, seven types of first effect symbols z1 (first effect symbol z1 displaying each identification information of "1" to "7") are defined. There is. Further, as the first effect symbol z1 corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, seven types of first effect symbols z1 (first effect symbol z1 for displaying each identification information of "1" to "7") are defined. There is.
In particular, the seven types of first effect symbols z1 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery are divided into "red symbol", "green symbol", and "blue symbol". Specifically, among the seven types of first effect symbols z1 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the first effect symbol z1 that displays "3" and the first effect symbol z1 that displays "7" are The first effect symbol z1 that displays "1" and the first effect symbol z1 that displays "5" are divided into "red symbols" and are divided into "green symbols", which are "2". The first effect symbol z1 for displaying "4", the first effect symbol z1 for displaying "4", and the first effect symbol z1 for displaying "6" are classified into "blue symbols".
On the other hand, the seven types of first effect symbols z1 corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are divided into "red symbols" and "green symbols". Specifically, among the seven types of first effect symbols z1 corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the first effect symbol z1 displaying "1" and the first effect symbol z1 and "5" displaying "3". The first effect symbol z1 for displaying "7" and the first effect symbol z1 for displaying "7" are classified into "red symbols", and the first effect symbols z1 and "4" for displaying "2" are displayed. The first effect symbol z1 to be displayed and the first effect symbol z1 to display "6" are classified into "green symbols".
The "red symbol" is a type of the first effect symbol z1 in which the background of the identification information is "red".
The "green symbol" is a type of the first effect symbol z1 in which the background of the identification information is "green".
The "blue symbol" is a type of the first effect symbol z1 in which the background of the identification information is "blue".
The second effect symbol z2 is composed of a color bar. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the second effect symbol z2.

The variable display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that the first effect symbol z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and is displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. 2 A display in which the type of the effect symbol z2 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is sequentially changed).
The stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that one type of the first effect symbol z1 is stopped at the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol display area a4. In, a display in which one type of second effect symbol z2 is displayed (a color bar represents a predetermined color).
Then, a special symbol is created by combining the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second effect symbol z2 that is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. The result of the lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
Further, on the display screen 31a, it is possible to configure the reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) on which the reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
In the reserved symbol display area b1, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information in the notification display (variation display and stop display of the special symbol) is displayed. In the reserved symbol display area b2, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information for which the notification display is suspended is displayed.

The sub image display device 32 is arranged at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31.
The sub-image display device 32 is composed of variable display devices such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT display. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying an effect image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) along the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including the origin position (see FIG. 2) and the effect position below the origin position (not shown). ..
The sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the origin position is arranged above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the effect position is arranged on the front side of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

A first starting port 51 is provided below the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The first starting port 51 is an entry port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and a game ball can enter the ball at all times. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
A special figure 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the first start port 51. The special figure 1 start port switch 101 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the first start port 51 (the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51). Output. The main control board 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101.

On the left side of the first starting opening 51 in the game area 30, an upper left other winning opening 55, a left middle other winning opening 56, and a lower left other winning opening 57 are provided. Each of the other winning openings 55 to 57 is an entrance opening that opens upward, and a game ball can be entered at all times. Each of the other winning openings 55 to 57 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left route (it is not possible to enter a game ball flowing down the right route).
The game board 11 is provided with a left winning opening switch 106 (see FIG. 3). The left winning opening switch 106 is a game ball that has entered the upper left other winning opening 55 (a game ball has entered the upper left other winning opening 55) and a game ball that has entered the left middle other winning opening 56 (a left middle other winning opening). The detection signal is sent to the main control board in response to the detection of the game ball entering the mouth 56) and the game ball entering the lower left other winning opening 57 (the entry of the game ball into the lower left other winning opening 57). Output for 200. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the left prize opening switch 106.

A start gate 41 is provided on the right side of the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The starting gate 41 is formed so that it can be passed by a game ball at all times. The starting gate 41 is capable of passing a game ball flowing down the right path (it is impossible for a game ball flowing down the left path).
A gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3) is provided at the starting gate 41. The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104.

A large winning opening 53 is provided below the starting gate 41 in the game area 30. The large winning opening 53 is displaced into a closed state that prevents the game ball from entering the large winning opening 53 and an open state that allows the game ball to enter the large winning opening 53. A special electric accessory (special electric accessory) 53a (so-called "attacker") is provided.
The special electric accessory 53a is opened and closed by the large winning opening solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). In the large winning opening 53, the special electric accessory 53a is normally closed and it is impossible to enter a game ball, but a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) By lottery), when a "small hit" or a "big hit" is won, the special electric accessory 53a is opened and a game ball can be entered. The large winning opening 53 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right route (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left route).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the large winning opening 53. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 53 (the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 53). The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103.
Further, in the large winning opening 53, a V region (not shown), a discharging region (not shown), and a game ball entering the large winning opening 53 are placed in one of the V region and the discharging region. There is a distribution means (not shown) for distributing to the area of.
A V region switch 110 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the V region. The V region switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball passing through the V region (passage of the V region by the game ball). The main control board 200 sets "1" in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later, with the input of the detection signal from the V area switch 110 as an opportunity (causes a big hit game state).
The distribution means is displaced into a V-passing state in which the game balls entered in the large winning opening 53 are distributed to the V region and a non-V passing state in which the game balls entered in the large winning opening 53 are distributed to the discharge region. It is possible to do.
That is, when the distribution means is displaced to the V passing state, all the game balls that have entered the large winning opening 53 are distributed to the V region. As a result, it becomes impossible for the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 53 to pass through the discharge area.
On the other hand, when the distribution means is displaced to the non-V passing state, all the game balls that have entered the large winning opening 53 are distributed to the discharge area. As a result, it is impossible for the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 53 to pass through the V region.
The sorting means is displaced by the V-region solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has entered the large winning opening 53 is first detected by the count switch 103, then distributed by the distribution means to one of the V region and the discharge region, and after passing through the region. , Is discharged to the discharge channel. At this time, the game balls distributed to the V region are detected by the V region switch 110.

A second starting opening 52 is provided below the large winning opening 53 in the game area 30. The second starting port 52 has a closed state that prevents the game ball from entering the second starting port 52 and an open state that allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 52. An ordinary electric accessory (ordinary electric accessory) 52a (so-called "electric tulip") that can be displaced is provided.
The ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). At the second starting port 52, the normal electric accessory 52a is normally closed and it is impossible to enter a game ball, but when the normal symbol lottery is won, the normal electric accessory 52 The 52a is set to the open state, and a game ball can be entered. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (it is impossible for a game ball flowing down the left path).
A special figure 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the second start port 52. The special figure 2 start port switch 102 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball (the game ball entering the second start port 52) that has entered the second start port 52. Output. The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102.

Below the second starting opening 52 in the game area 30, a right other winning opening 54 is provided. The right other winning opening 54 is an entry opening that opens upward, and a game ball can be entered at all times. The right other winning opening 54 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right route (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left route).
A right winning opening switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the right other winning opening 54. The right winning opening switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the right other winning opening 54 (the entry of the game ball into the right other winning opening 54). .. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the right prize opening switch 105.

At the lowermost position in the game area 30, an out port 58 for ejecting a game ball that has not entered (winned) in any of the winning openings 51 to 57 is provided.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which the game ball discharged from the game area 30 passes. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, all the game balls launched into the game area 30 (all the game balls discharged from the game area 30) are configured to pass through the discharge path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 is discharged from the game area 30 and flows into the discharge path by entering any of the winning openings 51 to 57 or by passing through the out opening 58. To do.
Specifically, the game balls that have entered each of the winning openings 51 to 57 are guided to the discharge path after being detected by the switches 101-103, 105, 106, 110 arranged in the winning openings. Further, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
An out switch 109 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the inner frame unit 3. Then, the out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball (the game ball discharged from the game area 30) passing through the discharge path. As a result, all the game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Further, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game ball to each of the winning openings 51 to 57 and the starting gate 41.

A main display device 60 is arranged on the game board 11. The main display device 60 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (LED in this embodiment).
Information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60.
The main display device 60 includes a special figure 1 display device, a special figure 2 display device, a normal figure display device, a special figure 1 hold display device, a special figure 2 hold display device, a normal figure hold display device, and a round. It is configured to include a display device, a right-handed display device, a probability change display device, and a time saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
In the main display device 60, LEDs 1 to LED8 constitute a special figure 1 display device, LEDs 7 to LED16 constitute a special figure 2 display device, and LEDs 17 and 18 constitute a normal figure display device, and LED19. ~ LED23 constitutes a round display device, LED24 constitutes a right-handed display device, LEDs 25 and 26 constitute a special figure 1 hold display device, and LEDs 27 and 28 constitute a special figure 2 hold display device. However, the LEDs 29 and 30 constitute a normal drawing hold display device, the LED 31 constitutes a probability variation display device, and the LED 32 constitutes a time saving display device.

The special figure 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special figure 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the special symbol display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4 are the times when the variable display is started. , The time when the stop display is started, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped display symbol are associated with each other.
Then, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), or the second special symbol (stop displayed) displayed on the special figure 2 display device. When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), a jackpot gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The ordinary symbol display device can perform variable display and stop display of ordinary symbols composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the ordinary symbol display device, the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed by the ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (per symbol per symbol), a game state per normal symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The special figure 1 hold display device displays the number of times (special figure 1 hold number) that the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is held.
The special figure 2 hold display device displays the number of times (special figure 2 hold number) that the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is held.
The number of times the display of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery is suspended (the number of reserved figures) is displayed on the normal figure hold display device.
The round display device displays the number of round games (type of big hit game state) executed during the big hit game state.
The right-handed display device displays the route (left side route or right side route) at which the game ball should be launched.
The probability change display device displays the gaming state at the time of power recovery (during the occurrence of the normal figure high probability state or during the occurrence of the normal figure low probability state).
The time saving display device displays the current gaming status (time saving control is being executed or stopped).

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with one or a plurality of movable body units (not shown). In the present embodiment, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with one or more movable body units, and the game board unit 10 is provided with one or more movable body units.
Each movable unit of the integrated door unit 4 is arranged on the front surface of the decorative portion 4b, the upper surface of the saucer unit 5, and the like, and can perform a predetermined effect operation.
Each movable body unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set plate. Specifically, each movable body unit is arranged in a space (hereinafter, referred to as "effect space") between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Then, each movable body unit can perform a predetermined effect operation in the effect space.
Each movable body unit includes an effect member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 24 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as a drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. A solenoid may be used as the drive source.
The effect member can be displaced along a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the effect member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and an effect position. The effect member is driven (displaced) by the motor 23.

The position detection sensor 24 is composed of a photo sensor or the like. The position detection sensor 24 detects the position of the effect member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 24 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit that receives the light projected from the light projecting unit. Then, the position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 in response to the light reception (detection) of the light projected from the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit. On the other hand, when the position detection sensor 24 does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit, the position detection sensor 24 stops the output of the detection signal to the effect control board 300.
In addition, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position of the effect member. Then, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the shielding plate is arranged between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 24, and the incoming light to the light receiving portion is blocked. As a result, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the output of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 to the effect control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the effect member is not arranged at the initial position, the position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300.
As a result, the effect control board 300 can detect whether or not the effect member is arranged at the initial position depending on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal states.
In the present embodiment, as the detection sensor, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are arranged.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2.

The vibration detection sensor 113 detects the vibration of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the vibration of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11. In the present embodiment, the game board 11 is provided with two radio wave detection sensors 114. Then, each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the radio wave.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects the magnetism generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is arranged in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Further, in the game board 11, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210.
The pachinko machine 1 includes various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control board 200, the effect control board 300, the payout control board 400, each control board 200, 300, 400, and the like. It includes a plurality of control boards such as a power supply board 600, a driver board 330, and a sub-connection board 340.
The plurality of control boards 200, 300, 400, 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards. Further, each control board 200, 300, 400, 600 is housed in a separate board case.
The main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The payout control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the payout control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3.

(Structure of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 includes a one-chip microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer), a clock generation circuit 202, a random number generation circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, and a sink. It is configured to include a driver 240, source drivers 250a, 250b, and the like.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI in which a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer is configured to include a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, and the like.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230. ..
Here, in FIG. 6, the address for specifying the memory area is indicated by a hexadecimal number (“H” indicates a hexadecimal number).

The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and a non-used area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. A program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the program area. Data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the data area. The used area m1 may be configured not to include an unused area.

The unused area m2 is configured to include a program area and a data area.
In the program area, there is a program (program code) for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine rules, and a program (program) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). Code) and are stored. In the data area, data (program data) for executing the process related to the test defined by the game machine rules and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 are stored.
Further, in addition to the used area m1 and the unused area m2, the ROM 220 is provided with an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
Arbitrary data such as the title and version of the program is stored in the ROM comment area. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
Further, the ROM 220 is provided with an unused area m3 of a predetermined byte (for example, 16 bytes or more) between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. As a result, the boundary between the used area m1 and the non-used area m2 is clarified.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The used area M1 is configured to include a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. The used area M1 may be configured not to include the unused area.
Specifically, the work area includes a set value area, a game machine state flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error-related area, a normal game-related area 1, and a normal game-related area 2. It is configured to include.

The set value is stored in the set value area. The game machine status flag is stored in the game machine status flag area. The checksum is stored in the checksum area. The backup flag is stored in the backup flag area. Information about the error is stored in the error-related area. A subcommand pointer or the like is stored in the normal game-related area 1. In the normal game-related area 2, input / output data on the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game state, and the like are stored. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 is an area for storing game information acquired by inputting detection signals from each of the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the special figure 2 start port switch 102, and the gate switch 104. (A game information storage area to be described later) is included in the configuration.

The unused area M2 is configured to include a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used during execution of a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test specified by a game machine rule or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is used as an area to temporarily store various data. On the other hand, in the stack area, a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test specified by a game machine rule or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206) is being executed. It is also used as an area to temporarily save various data.
Specifically, the work area is configured to include a performance display-related area. The performance display-related area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Further, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 having a predetermined byte (16 bytes or more) between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. Thereby, the boundary between the used area M1 and the non-used area M2 is clarified.

In the present embodiment, it is permitted to refer to the data stored in the non-used area M2 in the process based on the program (the program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1.
On the other hand, it is prohibited that the data stored in the unused area M2 is rewritten (changed) by the processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. There is.
Further, in the processing based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (the program for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine rules, or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, the used area is subjected to the processing based on the program stored in the non-used area m2 (the program for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine rules or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is prohibited that the data stored in M1 is rewritten (changed).
The game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronous signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment), and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203.
The random number generation circuit 203 has a first loop counter that generates a winning random number in the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number in the first special symbol lottery, and a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to include a three-loop counter and a fourth loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A random number is generated by winning a normal symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. Generate a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. Generate a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter sets the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, 0 to 10066) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once every 32 divisions of the clock frequency). Reach group random numbers are generated by updating one by one in (within range). In the present embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input ports 0 to 3).
At the input port 0, a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one radio wave detection sensor 114, and a magnetic detection sensor 115 The detection signal from is input.
A RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, a handle detection signal from the launchable condition detection unit 422, and the like are input to the input port 1.
The input port 2 has a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the right winning port switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning port switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a radio wave detection sensor 114 from the other. A detection signal or the like is input.
A detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, a detection signal from the V region switch 110, and the like are input to the input port 3. Will be done.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the detection signal from the switch sensor is set.
Specifically, when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level), "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, and the switch sensor is set. When the detection signal from is not input (low level), "0" is set.

The output port 205 includes a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output ports 0 to output ports 4).
The output port 0 outputs data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60. Then, the data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, a launch permission signal for detecting the launch conditions described later, and the like. The common signal output from the output port 1 is input to the sink driver 240.
The output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the drive of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the grand prize opening solenoid 65, a control signal for controlling the V region solenoid 66, and the like. To do.
The output port 4 outputs data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206. Then, the data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 250b.

Further, the main control board 200 includes a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand) from the command output port 1 to the effect control board 300, and also transmits a control command (payout command) from the command output port 2 to the payout control board 400. To do.
The command output port 1 and the command output port 2 are a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown), respectively. have.
The transmission data register outputs a control command input based on the subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers and can store a plurality of control commands. Then, the FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer and transmits it as serial data to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (LED in this embodiment). Since the performance display device 206 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11, it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the game machine state (hereinafter referred to as “game machine state”) includes a game available state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormality state, and a RAM abnormality state. And the backup abnormal state are specified. Then, the information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the state of the gaming machine being generated.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display unit is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to LED40 serve as the first digit display unit, the LEDs 41 to LED48 serve as the second digit display unit, the LEDs 49 to LED56 serve as the third digit display unit, and the LEDs 57 to LED64. Is the display unit of the 4th digit.

During the game-enabled state, the game can proceed. Then, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 during the occurrence of the playable state.
In the present embodiment, the first base ratio and the second base ratio are set every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in the present embodiment) in the performance display device 206 during the occurrence of the playable state. , Are displayed alternately.
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) is provided by the upper two-digit display unit among the four-digit display units. It is displayed, and a number indicating the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the display unit of the lower two digits.

The set value can be changed while the setting change state is occurring. Then, during the occurrence of the setting change state, the setting value stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the information indicating that the setting change state is occurring by the upper three-digit display unit of the four-digit display unit (specifically, the upper first digit “ "R", "n." In the upper 2nd digit, "-" in the upper 3rd digit) is displayed, and a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed by the display unit of the lowest 1 digit. Will be done.
The set value can be confirmed while the setting confirmation state is occurring. Then, during the occurrence of the setting confirmation state, the set value stored (set) in the set value area of the RAM 230 is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the information indicating that the setting confirmation state is being generated by the upper three-digit display unit of the four-digit display unit (specifically, the upper first digit “ "r", "n." In the upper 2nd digit, no display in the upper 3rd digit) is displayed, and a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed by the display unit of the lowest 1 digit. To.

While the game is stopped (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state), the game cannot proceed. Then, during the occurrence of the game stop state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code corresponding to the occurrence of the abnormality.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the information indicating that the game stopped state is occurring by the upper three-digit display unit among the four-digit display units (specifically, the upper first digit “ "E", "r." In the upper 2nd digit, no display in the upper 3rd digit) is displayed, and the error that occurred (setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error) is displayed by the display unit of the last 1 digit. A number indicating the error code corresponding to the status) is displayed.

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 is configured to include an operation unit that can be pressed. Then, the RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is pressed.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured to include an operation unit provided with a keyhole. By inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole, the operation unit is unlocked and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. Then, the setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is in the ON state.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of the common signal to the display devices 60 and 206 according to the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1.
The source driver 250a controls the output of the data signal to the main display device 60 according to the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 0.
The source driver 250b controls the output of the data signal to the performance display device 206 according to the data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4.
The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a source driver 250a corresponding to the main display device 60 and a source driver 250b corresponding to the performance display device 206. Then, the application of the power supply plan Vcc to the data signal line is individually controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, a common sink driver 240 is provided for the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. The grounding of the common signal line is collectively controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
As a result, it is not necessary to provide a sink driver 240 corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and as a result, an output port (common signal is output) corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. There is no need to provide an output port).
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts required for lighting control of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 on the main control board 200 (CPU210). It is not necessary to generate a common signal corresponding to each of the above, and it is possible to reduce the control load for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.

Further, the main control board 200 is configured to include a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In the test signal output process (step S4-24) described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (big hit game state, time saving control execution state, special symbol lottery probability state, etc.). Then, the generated test signal is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a predetermined output port. Then, the test signal output from the predetermined output port is input to the interface board of the test computer (not shown) via the test signal output circuit.
Further, in the main control board 200, the detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the count switch 103, and the right prize. The detection signal from the mouth switch 105, the detection signal from the left winning port switch 106, the detection signal from the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204, and at the same time, the test signal output circuit of the test computer Input to the interface board.
Further, in the main control board 200, each solenoid has a control signal for controlling the drive of each solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, grand prize opening solenoid 65, V region solenoid 66, etc.) output from the output port 3. It is input to 64 and 65, and is input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.

(Structure of payout control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board 400 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a launch condition detection circuit and a launch control circuit.
The payout control board 400 controls the launch of the game ball to the game area 30 and the payout of the game ball.
The payout control board 400 includes a one-chip microcomputer.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI in which a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer is configured to include a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (prize ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200. Further, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (ball lending operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 700.
Further, the payout control board 400 includes a resistance value (voltage value) input from the firing volume 411, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, a firing stop signal input from the firing stop switch 413, and a main control board. Based on the launch permission signal input from the 200 and the CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700, the game ball launch operation by the game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431) is controlled.
Hereinafter, a method of controlling the game ball launch operation by the payout control board 400 will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 400 is configured to include a launch condition detection circuit 420 and a launch control circuit 425 as a circuit for controlling the game ball payout operation.
The launch condition detection circuit 420 is a circuit that detects the establishment of the launch conditions described later.
The launch condition detection circuit 420 includes an operation detection unit 421, a launchable condition detection unit 422, and a launch condition detection unit 423.
The operation detection unit 421 is a circuit that detects the rotation operation (rotation operation amount) of the handle operation unit.
The operation detection unit 421 includes an operational amplifier that controls the output of the operation detection signal according to the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411 (the operation detection signal is set to a high level or a low level).
Specifically, in the firing handle unit 6, the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle operating unit. Then, the operation detection unit 421 detects the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411, and based on the detected resistance value (voltage value), the presence / absence of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit and the rotation operation of the handle operation unit. Detect the amount and.
Then, the operation detection unit 421 generates an operation detection signal when detecting the rotation operation of the steering wheel operation unit, and outputs the generated operation detection signal to the launchable condition detection unit 422 (operation detection). Make the signal high level). On the other hand, the operation detection unit 421 stops the output of the operation detection signal to the launchable condition detection unit 422 when the rotation operation of the handle operation unit is not detected (the operation detection signal is set to the low level).
Further, when the operation detection unit 421 detects the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, the operation detection unit 421 generates a firing intensity signal according to the rotation operation amount of the handle operation unit (resistance value of the firing volume 411), and the generated firing The intensity signal is output to the launch control circuit 425.

The launchable condition detection unit 422 is a circuit that detects the establishment of the launchable condition.
The launchable condition detection unit 422 has an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls output / stop of a predetermined signal according to the operation result of the logical product of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal, and an AND gate. It includes a transistor that switches the output / stop of the handle detection signal according to a predetermined signal output from the IC.
The "launchable condition" is a condition related to the player's operation (player's intention) among a plurality of conditions constituting the launch condition described later.
The firing conditions include (1) conditions based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit), and (2) the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (handle by the player). A condition based on the detection status of contact with the operation unit) and a condition based on (3) the detection status of the launch stop switch 413 (detection status of the operation of pressing the launch stop button) are included.
In the present embodiment, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 detect the rotation operation of the steering wheel operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 detects the contact of the player with the steering wheel operation unit. The firing enablement condition is satisfied when all the conditions of (3) that the pressing operation of the firing stop button is not detected by the firing stop switch 413 are satisfied. On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the launchable condition is not satisfied.
Here, the firing conditions include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the steering wheel operation unit), and (2) the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (player). As a configuration that includes a condition based on (detection status of contact with the steering wheel operation unit) and (3) a condition based on the detection status of the launch stop switch 413 (detection status of pressing operation of the launch stop button). It doesn't matter.
That is, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 have detected the rotation operation of the steering wheel operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 has detected the contact of the player with the steering wheel operation unit. When both of the above conditions are satisfied, the launchable condition is satisfied, and when at least one of the conditions (1) and (2) is not satisfied, the launchable condition is not satisfied. It doesn't matter.

Specifically, the launchable condition detection unit 422 includes an operation detection signal input from the operation detection unit 421, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, and a launch stop signal input from the launch stop switch 413. Based on this, it is detected whether or not the launchable condition is satisfied.
At this time, the launchable condition detection unit 422 detects the establishment of the launchable condition when all of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal is not input, the establishment of the launchable condition is not detected.
The launchable condition detection unit 422 generates a handle detection signal when detecting the establishment of the launchable condition, and transmits the generated handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the launch condition detection unit 423. Output (set the handle detection signal to high level). On the other hand, the launchable condition detection unit 422 stops the output of the handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the launch condition detection unit 423 when the establishment of the launchable condition is not detected (the handle detection signal is lowered). Level).

The launch condition detection unit 423 is a circuit that detects the establishment of the launch condition.
The launch condition detection unit 423 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls output / stop of the launch signal according to the calculation result of the logical product of the handle detection signal, the launch permission signal, and the CR connection signal. To.
The "launch condition" is a condition for executing the launch of the game ball (game ball launch operation) to the game area 30 by the game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431).
In the present embodiment, (1) the firing condition is satisfied, (2) the firing permission signal is input from the main control board 200, and (3) the CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700. The firing condition is satisfied when all the conditions of being done are satisfied. On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the firing condition is not satisfied.
The "launch permission signal" indicates that communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected). As a premise, when the playable state is set, the output is output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection unit 423.
Here, the launch permission signal may be output from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection unit 423 while the power is being turned on to the main control board 200, regardless of the game machine state. Absent. That is, when communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (when the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), a launch permission signal However, it may be configured to be output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection unit 423.
The "CR connection signal" is used when communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 (when the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected). It is output from the CR unit 700 to the launch condition detection unit 423.

Specifically, the launch condition detection unit 423 includes a handle detection signal input from the launchable condition detection unit 422, a launch permission signal input from the main control board 200, and a CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700. , Detects whether or not the firing condition is satisfied.
At this time, the launch condition detection unit 423 detects the establishment of the launch condition when all of the handle detection signal, the launch permission signal, and the CR connection signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one of the handle detection signal, the launch permission signal, and the CR connection signal is not input, the establishment of the launch condition is not detected.
The launch condition detection unit 423 generates a launch signal when detecting the establishment of the launch condition, and outputs the generated launch signal to the launch control circuit 425 (the launch signal is set to a high level). On the other hand, the launch condition detection unit 423 stops the output of the launch signal to the launch control circuit 425 (sets the launch signal to a low level) when the establishment of the launch condition is not detected.

The launch control circuit 425 is a circuit that controls the launch intensity of the game ball by the game ball launcher 430 and the launch timing of the game ball by the game ball launcher 430. That is, the launch control circuit 425 controls the output of the drive signal to the game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431).
Specifically, the firing control circuit 425 includes a clock generating unit (not shown), a firing timing control unit (not shown), and a firing solenoid driving unit (not shown).
The clock generation unit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency to the emission timing control unit.
The firing timing control unit generates a pulse signal for controlling the firing timing based on the clock signal input from the clock generating unit, and outputs the generated pulse signal to the firing solenoid driving unit. At this time, the firing timing control unit generates a pulse signal so that the number of game balls fired per minute is a predetermined number (for example, 100 [balls]).
The firing solenoid drive unit is based on a firing signal input from the firing condition detection unit 423, a pulse signal input from the firing timing control unit, and a firing intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421. Controls the output of the drive signal to 431.
Specifically, the firing solenoid drive unit is input from the operation detection unit 421 when the firing signal is input from the firing condition detection unit 423 and the pulse signal is input from the firing timing control unit. A drive signal (drive current) corresponding to the launch intensity signal is output to the launch solenoid 431. As a result, the game ball is launched with an intensity corresponding to the launch intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421.
On the other hand, the launch solenoid drive unit stops the output of the drive signal to the launch solenoid 431 when the launch signal is not input from the launch condition detection unit 423. As a result, the launch of the game ball is stopped.

The game ball launching device 430 includes a hitting mallet (not shown) and a launching solenoid 431 for driving the hitting mallet. The firing solenoid 431 is composed of a rotary solenoid. Here, the hitting mallet may be driven by another drive source such as a motor.
A game ball is supplied to the game ball launcher 430 from a ball feed unit (not shown). Then, when a drive signal is input to the launch solenoid 431, the launch solenoid 431 is driven in response to the input drive signal, and the game ball is launched by the hammer. As a result, the game ball is launched into the game area 30.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the launch is stopped on the premise that the playable state is set on the main control board 200 and the communication between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 is possible. When the handle operation unit is rotated (displaced from the initial position toward the limit position side) by the contact of the player without pressing the button, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching device 430 is started. .. Then, during the execution of the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching device 430, the game ball is launched into the game area 30 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the handle operation unit.
Further, when the launch stop button is pressed, the game ball launch operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped. That is, even when the handle operation unit is rotated by the contact of the player, when the launch stop button is pressed, the game ball launch operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped.
Further, when the handle operating unit is returned to the initial position (when the handle operating unit is not rotated), the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching device 430 is stopped. That is, even when the player is in contact with the handle operation unit, when the handle operation unit is returned to the initial position, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the output of the handle detection signal from the launchable condition detection unit 422 to the main control board 200 is maintained while the launchable condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as the “launchable state”). Will be done.
That is, a state is occurring in which the rotation operation of the handle operation unit is detected, the contact with the handle operation unit is detected, and the pressing operation of the firing stop button is not detected (launchable state). In addition, the output of the handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
At this time, as long as the launchable state is occurring, regardless of whether or not the launch permission signal is input from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of the game machine state set in the main control board 200). The output of the handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
Further, as long as the launchable state is generated, communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 regardless of whether or not a CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700 to the launch condition detection circuit 420. The output of the handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained regardless of whether it is in the state or not).
As described above, the main control board 200 can detect (understand) whether or not the launchable state is occurring, and control the progress of the game, the content of the effect, etc. according to the occurrence status of the launchable state. It becomes possible to do.

That is, the main control board 200 can be fired when it detects that the handle detection signal has changed from a state in which it has not been input to a state in which it has been input (the handle detection signal has changed from a low level to a high level). A game status specification command for designating the occurrence (start) of a state is transmitted to the effect control board 300.
On the other hand, the main control board 200 can be fired when it detects that the handle detection signal has changed from the input state to the non-input state (the handle detection signal has changed from a high level to a low level). A game status specification command for designating the release (end) of the state is transmitted to the effect control board 300.
As a result, the effect control board 300 detects the occurrence of the launchable state by receiving the game status specification command that specifies the occurrence of the launchable state, and receives the game status specification command that specifies the release of the launchable state. It is possible to detect the release of the fireable state.
Then, the effect control board 300 can change the effect content depending on whether or not the launchable state is being generated.

(Structure of effect control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the effect control board.
The effect control board 300 controls the effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, movable body effect, etc.) based on the control command received from the main control board 200.
As shown in FIG. 5, the effect control board 300 is configured to include a microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 301 and various external devices externally connected to the microcomputer 301.
In the present embodiment, various external devices include a control ROM 302, a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 303, a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 304, and the like.

The control ROM 302 stores a control program for controlling the operation of the microcomputer 301, various data necessary for executing the control program, and the like. In particular, the control ROM 302 contains effect scenario data corresponding to each effect number, animation data corresponding to each display effect number, sound scenario data corresponding to each sound effect number, lamp scenario data corresponding to each lamp effect number, and each. Movable body scenario data corresponding to the movable body effect number, various compression lamp drive data, and various compression motor drive data are stored (stored).
The "compressed lamp drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the lamp drive data in a predetermined format. The "lamp drive data" is data for driving various lamps 20 and 21 (data for designating the brightness values of the lamps 20 and 21 belonging to each system).
The "compressed motor drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the motor drive data in a predetermined format. The "motor drive data" is data for driving various motors 23 (data that defines the output value of each motor 23).
In this embodiment, a NOR flash memory (NOR ROM) is used as the control ROM 302. Here, as the control ROM 302, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) may be used.
The control ROM 302 is connected to the HOST interface 313 of the microcomputer 301.

Various compressed image data, various compressed audio data, and the like are stored (stored) in the CGROM 303.
The "compressed image data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) image data (material data) in a predetermined format. The "image data (material data)" is data of an image (moving image / still image) that is a material for drawing processing.
The "compressed audio data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) audio data in a predetermined format. The "voice data" is voice data output from various speakers 22.
In this embodiment, a NAND flash memory (NAND type ROM) is used as the CGROM 303. Specifically, the CGROM 303 is configured by an SSD (Solid State Drive) that uses a NAND flash memory as a storage unit.
The CGROM 303 is connected to the CG bus interface 314 of the microcomputer 301. The CG bus interface 314 is a SATA (Serial AT Attitude) standard connection interface. As a result, the reading of various data stored in the CGROM 303 is SATA-transferred.

The DRAM 304 is provided with a preload area. Various data (specifically, compressed image data, compressed audio data, etc.) stored in the CGROM 303 are transferred (preloaded) to the preload area.
Further, the DRAM 304 is provided with a drawing command buffer area, a sound command buffer area, a lamp command buffer area, and a motor command buffer area. In the present embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the drawing command buffer area, and the DRAM 304 is provided with two drawing command buffer areas.
The two drawing command buffer areas have the same size. Of the two drawing command buffer areas, the other drawing command buffer area is designated as the transfer area while one drawing command buffer area is designated as the construction area. Further, for each drawing command buffer area, the designation of the construction area and the designation of the transfer area are alternately switched for each frame.
Then, for each drawing command buffer area, during the period specified in the construction area, the display list described later is stored (generated / constructed) in the drawing command buffer area, and during the period specified in the transfer area. , The display list stored in the drawing command buffer area is transferred to the VDP (specifically, the preloader circuit 319).
The DRAM 304 is connected to the DRAM interface 315 of the microcomputer 301.

The microcomputer 301 is an LSI in which a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated.
The microcomputer 301 controls the effect operation by various effect means based on the control command received from the main control board 200.
The "various effect means" include various image display devices 31, 32, various speakers 22, various lamps 20, 21, and various motors 23 (various movable bodies). Therefore, in the "effect operation by various production means", display of production images by various image display devices 31 and 32, sound output by various speakers 22, driving (lighting) of various lamps 20 and 21, and various motors 23 (lighting). Driving of various movable bodies) is included.
The microcomputer 301 includes a CPU 310, a work memory for a CPU 311, a CPU interface 312, a host interface 313, a CG bus interface 314, a DRAM interface 315, a VRAM 316, a serial communication controller 317, a transfer circuit 318, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, and a graphic. It includes internal devices such as a CPU circuit 321 and a drawing circuit 322, and a sound controller 323, and these internal devices are bus-connected to the data bus 324.

The CPU 310 is connected to the HOST interface 313 via the CPU interface 312. Further, the main control board 200 is connected to the HOST interface 313, and control commands from the main control board 200 are input. Further, a data bus 324 is connected to the HOST interface 313.
As a result, the CPU 310 can receive a control command (subcommand) from the main control board 200 via the HOST interface 313.
Further, the CPU 310 can communicate with internal devices such as the serial communication controller 317, the preloader circuit 319, the display circuit 320, and the sound controller 323 via the HOST interface 313 and the data bus 324. ..
Further, the CPU 310 can read various data (control program, control data, etc.) stored in the control ROM 302 via the HOST interface 313.
In addition, the CPU 310 can read various data (compressed audio data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the HOST interface 313, the data bus 324, and the CG bus interface 314.
Further, the CPU 310 can read / write data to / from the DRAM 304 via the HOST interface 313, the data bus 324, and the DRAM interface 315.

The CPU 310 executes various arithmetic processes required for controlling the effect operation by the various effect means, control processes of the internal device corresponding to the various arithmetic processes, and the like.
At this time, the CPU 310 uses the CPU work memory (RAM) 311 and the DRAM 304 as a work area for various arithmetic processing, a buffer area for various arithmetic processing data, a table data area, a buffer area for various input / output data, and the like. To do.
That is, the CPU 310 selects an effect (effect number) to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and various scenario data (effect scenario data, animation data, sound scenario) corresponding to the selected effect number. Select and set data, lamp scenario data, movable body scenario data, etc.). Then, internal commands (drawing command, sound command, lamp command, etc.) for controlling various internal devices (VDP, sound controller 323, lamp controller 317a, motor controller 317b, etc.) according to various selected / set scenario data. (Motor command, etc.) is generated.

Specifically, the CPU 310 generates a display list in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area according to the animation data.
The "display list" is a collection of drawing commands for one frame. That is, the drawing commands for one frame are described in the display list in a predetermined order. Then, in the VDP, the drawing data for one frame is generated by executing the processing based on each drawing command in the order described in the display list.
The "drawing command" is information that specifies the content of the drawing process (drawing control) to be executed by VDP. In particular, the drawing command includes the address of the storage area in which the compressed image data used for drawing is stored (hereinafter referred to as "image address"), the magnification at the time of drawing the image data (magnification / reduction ratio), and the said. The coordinates for drawing the image data (coordinates in the frame buffer area) and the like are specified.
Further, the CPU 310 generates a sound command in the sound command buffer area according to the sound scenario data.
The "sound command" is information that specifies the content of the voice output process (voice output control) to be executed by the sound controller 323.
Further, the CPU 310 generates a lamp command in the lamp command buffer area according to the lamp scenario data.
The "lamp command" is information that specifies the content of the lamp drive process (lamp drive control) to be executed by the lamp controller 317a.
Further, the CPU 310 generates a motor command in the motor command buffer area according to the movable body scenario data.
The "motor command" is information that specifies the content of the motor drive process (motor drive control) to be executed by the motor controller 317b.

Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304.
That is, the NAND type flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can easily increase the capacity as compared with the NOR type flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but the data read speed is slow. Therefore, if the compressed audio data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the audio output process is executed by the sound controller 323, the processing performance may be significantly deteriorated.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data reading speed than the CGROM 303, before the audio output processing is executed. .. Then, the compressed audio data is read from the DRAM 304 when the audio output process is executed, thereby preventing the processing performance from being deteriorated.

Specifically, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) a predetermined compressed audio data among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304. At this time, in the present embodiment, all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304. Here, among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303, a part of the compressed audio data may be transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, after the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it is possible to control the audio output by the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323). In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the audio output by the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323).
Further, after the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the display control of the effect image (drawing process by VDP) by the various image display devices 31 and 32 can be executed. In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the display of the effect image (drawing process by VDP) by the various image display devices 31 and 32. ..
On the other hand, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it is possible to control the drive (light emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21 (lamp drive process by the lamp controller 317a).
Further, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the drive control of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive process by the motor controller 317b) can be executed.

The transfer circuit 318 executes the transfer of various data between internal devices.
Specifically, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area designated in the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319. Further, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 to the drawing circuit 322.
Further, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the sound command stored in the sound command buffer area to the sound controller 323. Further, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the lamp command stored in the lamp command buffer area to the lamp controller 317a. Further, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the motor command stored in the motor command buffer area to the motor controller 317b.

The VRAM 316 is provided with an image development area. Then, the image data (material data) expanded (restored / decoded) by the graphics decoder circuit 321 is temporarily stored in the image expansion area.
Further, the VRAM 316 is provided with a frame buffer area. In the present embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the frame buffer area, and the VRAM 316 is provided with two frame buffer areas.
The two framebuffer areas have the same size. Of the two framebuffer areas, the other framebuffer area is designated as the output area while one framebuffer area is designated as the drawing area. Further, for each frame buffer area, the designation of the drawing area and the designation of the output area are alternately switched for each frame.
Then, for each frame buffer area, during the period designated for the drawing area, the drawing data for one frame is stored (generated / drawn) in the frame buffer area, and during the period designated for the output area. , The output of the video signal is executed based on the drawing data for one frame stored in the frame buffer area.

In the microcomputer 301, the preloader circuit 319, the display circuit 320, the graphics decoder circuit 321 and the drawing circuit 322 function as a VDP (Video Display Processor).
The VDP controls the display of the effect image by the various image display devices 31 and 32. Specifically, the VDP generates drawing data in response to receiving a display list (drawing command) from the CPU 310, generates a video signal based on the generated drawing data, and uses the generated video signal as various images. Output to display devices 31 and 32.
The preloader circuit 319 can read various data (compressed image data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the CG bus interface 314.
In particular, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 before the drawing process by the drawing circuit 322 is executed.
That is, as described above, the NAND type flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can easily increase the capacity as compared with the NOR type flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but the data reading speed is slow. Therefore, if the compressed image data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the drawing process is executed by the drawing circuit 322, the processing performance may be significantly deteriorated.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data reading speed than the CGROM 303, before the drawing process is executed. The compressed image data is read from the DRAM 304 when the drawing process is executed, thereby preventing the processing performance from being deteriorated.

Specifically, each time the preloader circuit 319 receives the display list, of the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303, the compressed image data for one frame specified in the display list is stored in the preload area of the DRAM 304. Transfer (preload) to. At this time, the preloader circuit 319 rewrites the display list.
That is, in the display list generated by the CPU 310, an address that specifies the storage area of the CGROM 303 is described as an image address included in each drawing command. Therefore, for each drawing command included in the display list, the preloader circuit 319 stores compressed image data stored in a storage area (storage area of CGROM 303) designated by the image address included in the drawing command in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304. After transferring to, the image address included in the drawing command is rewritten to an address that specifies the storage area (predetermined area of DRAM 304) after transfer. This will generate a new display list with the image address rewritten.
Here, in the present embodiment, the preloader circuit 319 is configured to transfer (preload) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304. However, the preloader circuit 319 may be configured to transfer the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a predetermined area (preload area) of the VRAM 316.
The display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 is transferred to the drawing circuit 320 by the transfer circuit 318.

The drawing circuit 322 stores (generates / draws) drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area according to the display list received from the preloader circuit 319.
Specifically, each time the drawing circuit 320 receives the display list, the drawing circuit 320 reads out the compressed image data for one frame specified in the display list from the DRAM 304. The compressed image data for one frame read from the DRAM 304 is restored (decoded / decoded) by the graphic decoder circuit 321 and stored (expanded) in the image expansion area of the VRAM 316. Then, the drawing circuit 320 uses the image data stored in the image development area to generate drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated in the drawing area.

The display circuit 320 generates a video signal based on the drawing data for one frame stored (generated / drawn) in the frame buffer area designated as the output area, and displays the generated video signal in various images. Output to devices 31 and 32. In this embodiment, a digital RGB signal is output as a video signal. Here, as a video signal, an LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) signal may be output.
Specifically, the display circuit 320 includes a data acquisition circuit (not shown), a scaler circuit (not shown), a color correction circuit (not shown), a ditherer circuit (not shown), and a synchronization signal generation circuit (not shown). It is composed of including) and the like.
The data acquisition circuit reads the drawing data stored in the frame buffer area specified in the output area.
The scaler circuit can perform scaling processing (enlargement processing / reduction processing) on the drawing data read by the data acquisition circuit.
The color correction circuit can perform color correction processing on the drawing data after processing by the scaler circuit.
The dither circuit can perform dithering processing on the drawing data after processing by the color correction circuit.
Then, the drawing data after processing by the dithering circuit is output as a video signal (digital RGB signal).
The synchronization signal generation circuit generates a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal (Vsync). Then, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the generated horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal to the various image display devices 31 and 32. Further, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the generated vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310.
Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image (display of the effect image based on the drawing data for one frame) in the image display devices 31 and 32 is updated every 16.66 [ms]. Therefore, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs a vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310 (set to a high level) every 16.66 [ms].

The sound controller 323 controls the output of audio by the various speakers 22.
Specifically, the sound controller 323 generates an audio signal in response to receiving a sound command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated audio signal to various speakers 22.
The sound controller 323 includes a voice decoder circuit (not shown). The voice decoder circuit reads the compressed voice data specified by the sound command from the DRAM 304 in response to the reception of the sound command from the CPU 310. In addition, the read compressed audio data is restored (decoded / decoded). Then, an audio signal is generated based on the restored audio data, and the generated audio signal is output to various speakers 22.

The serial communication controller 317 includes a lamp controller 317a and a motor controller 317b.
The lamp controller 317a controls the driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21.
Specifically, the lamp controller 317a generates lamp drive data in response to the reception of the lamp command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated lamp drive data together with the clock signal to the lamp drivers 332 and 342. At this time, the lamp drive data is output as serial data.
The lamp controller 317a includes a lamp decoder circuit (not shown). The lamp decoder circuit reads the compressed lamp drive data specified by the lamp command from the control ROM 302 in response to the reception of the lamp command from the CPU 310. In addition, the read compression lamp drive data is restored (decoded / decoded). Then, the lamp drive data is generated based on the restored lamp drive data, and the generated lamp drive data is output to the lamp drivers 332 and 342.

The motor controller 317b controls the drive of various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Specifically, the motor controller 317b generates motor drive data in response to receiving a motor command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated motor drive data to the motor drivers 333 and 343 together with the clock signal. At this time, the motor drive data is output as serial data.
The motor controller 317b includes a motor sequencer circuit (not shown). The motor sequencer circuit reads the compressed motor drive data specified by the motor command from the control ROM 302 in response to the reception of the motor command from the CPU 310. In addition, the read compression motor drive data is restored (decoded / decoded). Then, the motor drive data is generated based on the restored motor drive data, and the generated motor drive data is output to the motor drivers 333 and 343.
Further, information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 is input from the driver board 330 to the motor controller 317b, information indicating the detection status of the switches 25 to 29 from the sub-connection board 340, and various sensors 24. Information indicating the detection status of is input.

(Method of controlling the effect by the effect control board 300)
Next, a method of controlling the effect by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 selects an effect (effect number) to be executed according to a control command received from the main control board 200. Then, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.
The "production scenario data" is information that defines the progress of the production. Specifically, a plurality of process data are registered in the production scenario data in chronological order. That is, a plurality of process data and information for designating the start time (start timing) of the process based on each process data are registered in the effect scenario data.
Each process data contains one or more command information. In particular, as command information, command information (hereinafter referred to as "effect start command") for designating the start of sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect), sub-effect (display effect, sound). Command information (hereinafter referred to as "effect end command") for designating the end of the effect, the lamp effect, or the movable body effect) is specified.

The effect start command is configured to include information for designating a sub effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect) to be started. Specifically, the effect start command is configured to include information for designating a sub effect number (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable body effect number) of the sub effect to be started.
The effect end command is configured to include information for designating a sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect) to be terminated. Specifically, the effect end command is configured to include information for designating a sub effect number (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable body effect number) of the sub effect to be terminated.

Further, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the effect based on the effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates the effect scenario timer set in the effect scenario setting area at a predetermined cycle, and the effect set in the effect scenario setting area based on the updated value of the effect scenario timer. In the process data registered in the scenario data, it is determined whether or not the process data whose start time has come exists. Then, when it is determined that the process data whose start time has arrived exists, each command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, command information related to the display effect (effect start command for designating the start of the display effect, effect end command for designating the end of the display effect, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area. On the other hand, command information related to the sound effect (effect start command for designating the start of the sound effect, effect end command for designating the end of the sound effect, etc.) is stored in the sound command buffer area. On the other hand, command information related to the lamp effect (effect start command for designating the start of the lamp effect, effect end command for designating the end of the lamp effect, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area. On the other hand, command information related to the movable body effect (effect start command for designating the start of the movable body effect, effect end command for designating the end of the movable body effect, etc.) is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

Further, the CPU 310 (display control unit) determines whether or not the command information is stored in the display command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the display command buffer area, each command information stored in the display command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the display command buffer area, among the animation data stored in the control ROM 302, the animation data corresponding to the display effect number specified by the effect start command is read and read. The animation data and the sub-scenario timer corresponding to the animation data are set (stored) in the display scenario setting area of the DRAM 304. As a result, the animation data stored in the control ROM 302 is duplicated (stored / set) in the display scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.
Here, one or a plurality of animation data can be set in the display scenario setting area.
The "animation data" is information (various parameters for controlling the display of the image) that defines the progress of the display effect (display of the effect image) by the various image display devices 31 and 32. In other words, the animation data is information that defines the movement of the image.
Specifically, the animation data includes information (image address information) that specifies image data (compressed image data) used for drawing, information that specifies the display priority of the image data (display effect), and when drawing the image data. Information that specifies the magnification (magnification / reduction ratio) of the image (hereinafter referred to as "display magnification information"), information that specifies the coordinates for drawing the image data (coordinates in the frame buffer area) (hereinafter, "display coordinate information") ”) Etc. are included. In particular, in the animation data, for a predetermined number of frames, display magnification information, display seating chart information, and the like corresponding to each frame are registered in chronological order.

Then, the CPU 310 controls the display of the effect image corresponding to each frame based on one or a plurality of animation data set in the display scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates the sub-scenario timer corresponding to each animation data set in the display scenario setting area at a predetermined cycle. Further, among the information defined in each animation data, the display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area designated in the construction area based on the information corresponding to the updated sub-scenario timer value.
As a result, the VDP is controlled according to the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area, and the display effect (display of the effect image by the various image display devices 31 and 32) is controlled.
That is, when one animation data is set in the display scenario setting area, a display list for designating the drawing of the image data specified by the one animation data is constructed.
On the other hand, when a plurality of animation data are set in the display scenario setting area, it is specified that the drawing of the image data specified by the plurality of animation data is executed in a predetermined order (order). The display list is built.
At this time, based on the display priority specified by the display priority information set in the display scenario setting area, the order in which the drawing of the image data corresponding to the display priority information is executed is set.

Further, the CPU 310 determines whether or not the command information is stored in the sound command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, each command information stored in the sound command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the sound command buffer area, the sound scenario data corresponding to the sound effect number specified by the effect start command is read out from the sound scenario data stored in the control ROM 302. , The read sound scenario data and the sub-scenario timer corresponding to the sound scenario data are set (stored) in the sound scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.
Here, one or a plurality of sound scenario data can be set in the sound scenario setting area.
The "sound scenario data" is information that defines the progress of sound production (sound output) by various speakers 22.
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the sound effect based on one or a plurality of sound scenario data set in the sound scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates each sub-scenario timer set in the sound scenario setting area at a predetermined cycle. Further, among the information defined in each sound scenario data, a sound command is generated in the sound command buffer area based on the information corresponding to the updated sub-scenario timer value.
As a result, the sound controller 323 is controlled according to the sound command generated in the sound command buffer area, and the sound effect (sound output by various speakers 22) is controlled.

Further, the CPU 310 determines whether or not the command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, each command information stored in the lamp command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the lamp scenario data corresponding to the lamp effect number specified by the effect start command is read out from the lamp scenario data stored in the control ROM 302. , The read lamp scenario data and the sub-scenario timer corresponding to the lamp scenario data are set (stored) in the lamp scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.
Here, one or a plurality of lamp scenario data can be set in the lamp scenario setting area.
The "lamp scenario data" is information that defines the progress of the lamp effect (driving (light emission) pattern of the various lamps 20 and 21) by the various lamps 20 and 21.
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the lamp effect based on one or a plurality of lamp scenario data set in the lamp scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates each sub-scenario timer set in the lamp scenario setting area at a predetermined cycle. Further, among the information defined in each lamp scenario data, a lamp command is generated in the lamp command buffer area based on the information corresponding to the updated sub-scenario timer value.
As a result, the lamp controller 317a is controlled according to the lamp command generated in the lamp command buffer area, and the lamp effect (driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21) is controlled.

Further, the CPU 310 determines whether or not the command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, each command information stored in the movable body command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the effect start command is stored in the movable body command buffer area, the movable body scenario corresponding to the movable body effect number specified by the effect start command among the movable body scenario data stored in the control ROM 302. The data is read out, and the read movable body scenario data and the sub-scenario timer corresponding to the movable body scenario data are set (stored) in the movable body scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.
The "movable body scenario data" is information that defines the progress of the movable body effect (the drive pattern of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies)) by the various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the movable body effect based on one or a plurality of movable body scenario data set in the movable body scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates each sub-scenario timer set in the movable body scenario setting area at a predetermined cycle. Further, among the information defined in each movable body scenario data, a motor command is generated in the motor command buffer area based on the information corresponding to the updated sub-scenario timer value.
As a result, the motor controller 317b is controlled according to the motor command generated in the motor command buffer area, and the movable body effect (driving of various motors 23 (various movable bodies)) is controlled.

(Configuration of driver board 330)
The driver board 330 includes a parallelless serial conversion circuit 331, a lamp driver 332, and a motor driver 333.
The lamp driver 332 controls the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system constituting the board surface lamp 21 according to the lamp drive data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, in the lamp drive data, the brightness values corresponding to each system constituting the board lamp 21 are specified. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the brightness value specified in the lamp drive data is supplied to each system constituting the board lamp 21. As a result, the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group constituting the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 333 is an excitation signal (drive current) for various motors 23 (motors 23 constituting various movable body units) arranged in the game board unit 10 according to the motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. Control the output of.
At this time, in the motor drive data, the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the game board unit 10 is specified. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the output value specified in the motor drive data is supplied to each motor 23. As a result, the drive is controlled for each motor 23.
Detection signals from various sensors 24 are input to the parallel serial conversion circuit 331. Then, the parallel serial conversion circuit 331 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 into serial data and outputs the detection signals to the serial communication controller 317.

(Structure of sub-connection board 340)
The sub-connection board 340 includes a parallelless serial conversion circuit 341, a lamp driver 342, and a motor driver 343.
The lamp driver 342 controls the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system constituting the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp drive data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, in the lamp drive data, the brightness value corresponding to each system constituting the frame lamp 20 is specified. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the brightness value specified in the lamp drive data is supplied to each system constituting the frame lamp 20. As a result, the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group constituting the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 343 is an excitation signal (drive current) for various motors 23 (motors 23 constituting various movable body units) arranged in the integrated door unit 4 according to the motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. Control the output of.
At this time, in the motor drive data, the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the integrated door unit 4 is specified. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the output value specified in the motor drive data is supplied to each motor 23. As a result, the drive is controlled for each motor 23.
The detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 are input to the parallel serial conversion circuit 341. Then, the parallel serial conversion circuit 341 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 into serial data and outputs the detection signals to the serial communication controller 317.

(About the state of the game machine)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, a game-enabled state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormality state, a RAM abnormality state, and a backup abnormality state) are defined as game machine states. ..
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a game machine state flag area. In the game machine state flag area, six game machine states (specifically, game available state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, and backup abnormality state) are set as game machine state flags. ), The value corresponding to any one of the gaming machine states is stored (set). Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a game machine state corresponding to the value stored in the game machine state flag area is generated.

The "gamable state" is a game machine state in which the game can proceed.
During the game-enabled state, the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, are permitted to be executed. As a result, the game (normal game and special game) can be advanced.
In addition, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 during the game-enabled state. In addition, information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The "setting change state" is a gaming machine state in which the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state is generated when the setting change condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection signal is detected from the RAM clear switch 207. When the signal is input, the setting change condition is satisfied. That is, when the power is turned on, when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state occurs. Will be done.
While the setting change state is occurring, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Further, while the setting change state is occurring, the set value stored in the set value area can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 207. Then, if the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the game-enabled state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is fixed.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The setting confirmation state is generated when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection signal is detected from the RAM clear switch 207. When no signal is input, the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed, a setting confirmation state occurs. Will be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the setting confirmation state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. This makes it possible to check the set value stored in the set value area. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
It should be noted that the set value stored in the set value area cannot be changed while the setting confirmation state is occurring.
Then, if the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the game-enabled state is generated instead of the setting confirmation state.

The "setting error state" is a game machine state in which a setting error has occurred.
The setting abnormal state occurs when it is determined that the set value set in the set value area is not within the specified range during the occurrence of the gameable state.
During the occurrence of the setting abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the setting abnormality state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code specifying the occurrence of the setting abnormality. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the abnormal setting state, it is necessary to turn off the power and turn on the power to cause the setting change state.

The "RAM abnormal state" is a game machine state in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read / write abnormality of the RAM 230 has occurred when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the RAM abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the RAM abnormality state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code specifying the occurrence of the RAM abnormality. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power cutoff and power on to cause a setting change state.

The "backup error state" is a game machine state in which a backup error has occurred.
The backup abnormality state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality of the RAM 230 (specifically, an abnormality of the backup flag or an abnormality of the checksum) occurs when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the backup abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the backup abnormality state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code specifying the occurrence of the backup abnormality. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to turn off the power and turn on the power to cause the setting change state.

(About set value)
Next, the set value (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "set value" is information that specifies the winning probability (probability of winning the "big hit") of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery). In the present embodiment, values of "0" to "5" are defined as set values.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. In the set value area, any one of "0" to "5" is stored (set) as a set value. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to the probability corresponding to the value set in the set value area.
In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is constant regardless of the set value. However, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery may change according to the set value.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the set value stored in the set value area while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the change of the set value is executed by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (an employee of the amusement park where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc.).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed. A change state occurs.
During the occurrence of the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Further, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the set value stored in the set value area is changed. At this time, if the set value set in the set value area is changed, the set value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
Then, if the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the game-enabled state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is fixed.

(About base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, the base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210 during the game-playable state. In the present embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only during the occurrence of a predetermined gaming state (specifically, while the time reduction control is stopped).
Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 during the occurrence of the playable state.
The "base ratio" is the number of game balls fired in the game area 30 and the predetermined entry ports (in the present embodiment, the first start opening 51, the second start opening 52, and other winning openings 54 to 57). The information is calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game balls. Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts to the number of out balls.
In the present embodiment, the base ratio in the section is calculated for each predetermined section (period). Then, as a predetermined section, a section in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 [balls] in the present embodiment) is detected (discharged) is defined. That is, each section starts according to the end of the previous section and ends when the number of out balls detected during the current section reaches a predetermined number (60,000 [balls]). Then, the CPU 210 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each section.
In addition, a predetermined time may be specified as a predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
"Number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. The “out ball” refers to a game ball discharged from the game area 30. Specifically, the out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
The game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game balls discharged from the out port 58, and the game balls detected by the out switch 109 may be used as the out balls.
The “number of payouts” refers to the total number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the other winning ports 54 to 57.

(About time saving control)
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute a time saving control as an auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During the execution of the time reduction control, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 (acquisition of the special drawing 2 game information) as compared with the time reduction control being stopped, which is advantageous to the player.
Specifically, during the execution of the time reduction control, the probability of winning the "normal symbol hit" is improved by the ordinary symbol lottery described later, as compared with the case where the time reduction control is stopped. That is, while the time saving control is stopped, the normal figure is in the low probability state, and while the time saving control is being executed, the normal figure is in the high probability state.
Then, while the time saving control is stopped (during the occurrence of the low probability state of the normal figure), the probability of winning the "per normal figure" by the ordinary symbol lottery is set as the first probability. On the other hand, during the execution of the time saving control (during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure), the probability of winning the "per normal figure" by the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the second probability higher than the first probability.
Further, during the execution of the time reduction control, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is shortened as compared with the time when the time reduction control is stopped, and the normal electric accessory 52a is opened in the game state per normal symbol described later. As the number of times is increased, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is extended.

(About various lottery)
Next, various lottery executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate 41.
In the present embodiment, as a result of the ordinary symbol lottery, "per ordinary symbol" and "off" are defined.
In the normal symbol lottery (judgment of winning a normal figure) executed while the time reduction control is stopped (during the occurrence of a low probability state of a normal figure), the probability of being judged as "winning a normal figure" (winning) is 1/65536. ..
On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery (judgment of winning a normal figure) executed while the time saving control is being executed (during the occurrence of a high probability state of a normal figure), the probability of being judged as "winning a normal figure" (winning) is 1/1. (Or approximately 1/1).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, "1 per normal symbol"("1 per normal symbol") is selected as the winning type (type of symbol per normal symbol) selected when the "per regular symbol" is won by the ordinary symbol lottery. ) Only is specified.
When "1 per normal figure" is won, the normal symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed at "1 per normal figure" in the normal symbol display device.
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost (in the case of "missing"), the normal symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed at the "missing symbol" in the normal symbol display device.
If "1 per normal figure" is won, a game state per normal figure is generated. Then, in the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 52.
In the game state per normal figure, the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is 0.5 [s] or 2 It is set to 0.0 [s].
At this time, during the execution of the time reduction control, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each opening is 2.0 [s. ] Is set.
On the other hand, while the time reduction control is stopped, the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each opening is 0.5 [s]. Is set to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 51, and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. A special symbol lottery is executed.
In the present embodiment, as a result of the first special symbol lottery, "big hit" and "missing" are defined. On the other hand, as a result of the second special symbol lottery, "big hit" and "small hit" are defined.
As a result of the first special symbol lottery, a "small hit" may be defined. In particular, the winning type (type of "small hit symbol") selected when the "small hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery may include "small hit (without V)". Here, "small hit (without V)" is a winning type in which it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state.
In addition, as a result of the second special symbol lottery, "out of place" may be defined.

In the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 hit determination based on game information), the probability of winning the "big hit" is 1/319, and the probability of losing ("missing") is 318/319.
In the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 hit determination based on game information), the probability of winning the "big hit" is 1/319, and the probability of winning the "small hit" is 318/319.
Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) does not change according to the set value. There is. However, the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) may change according to the set value.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the winning type (type of "big hit symbol") selected when the "big hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery, "big hit 1" and "big hit 2"("big hit symbol 1"). "And" jackpot symbol 2 ") are specified.
When the "big hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery, the probability that "big hit 1"("big hit symbol 1") is selected is halved, and "big hit 2"("big hit symbol 2") is selected. The probability of being done is halved.
On the other hand, as the winning types (types of "big hit symbols") selected when the "big hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery, "big hit 3" and "big hit 4"("big hit symbols 3" and "big hit symbols") 4 ") is stipulated.
If the "big hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery, the probability that "big hit 3"("big hit symbol 3") will be selected is halved, and "big hit 4"("big hit symbol 4") is selected. The probability of being done is halved.
On the other hand, as the winning type (type of "small hit symbol") selected when "small hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery, "small hit 1" and "small hit 2"("small hit symbol 1") "And" Small hit symbol 2 ") are specified.
When the "small hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery, the probability that "small hit 1"("small hit symbol 1") is selected is halved, and "small hit 2"("small hit symbol 1") is selected. The probability that 2 ”) will be selected is halved.

When the "big hit 1" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit symbol 1" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "special diagram 1 high-accuracy symbol" or the "special diagram 1 normal symbol" is stopped and displayed. Here, when the "big hit 1" is won and the stop symbol corresponding to the "special figure 1 normal symbol" is stopped and displayed, the promotion effect is executed during the ending period described later. Then, in the promotion effect, the stop symbol is promoted from "special figure 1 normal symbol" to "special figure 1 high accuracy symbol".
When the "big hit 2" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit symbol 2" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "special figure 1 normal symbol" is stopped and displayed.
In the "special figure 1 high-accuracy symbol", the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 has the same identification information ("3" or "7". ) Is displayed in the "red symbol", and the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, is displayed in a predetermined color.
In the "special figure 1 normal symbol", the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 has the same identification information ("1", "2", The "green symbol" or "blue symbol" that displays "4", "5", or "6") is aligned, and the second effect symbol z2 that is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 indicates a predetermined color. The display mode is used.

When the "big hit 3" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit symbol 3" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When the "big hit 4" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit symbol 4" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "special figure 2 normal symbol" is stopped and displayed.
In the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol", the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 has the same identification information ("1", "3". , "5" or "7") is displayed, and the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, is displayed in a predetermined color.
In the "special figure 2 normal symbol", the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 has the same identification information ("2", "4" or The display mode is such that the "green symbol" for displaying "6") is aligned and the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, indicates a predetermined color.

When the "small hit 1" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "small hit symbol 1" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When the "small hit 2" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "small hit symbol 2" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "special figure 2 normal symbol" is stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is lost (in the case of "missing"), the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed.
In the "missing symbol", for example, at least one of the first effect symbols z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the other first effect symbol z1. It is a combination that displays identification information different from that of the 1 effect symbol z1, and the display mode is such that the second effect symbol z2 that is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 shows a predetermined color.

When "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 4"("Big hit symbol 1" to "Big hit symbol 4") are won, a big hit game state occurs. Then, in the big hit game state, the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the big winning opening 53.
Specifically, during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, a predetermined number of round games are executed.
In the present embodiment, when "big hit 1" to "big hit 4" are won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times].
Further, when "big hit 1" to "big hit 4" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 53a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). Set.
In each round game, (1) the maximum opening time has elapsed since the special electric accessory 53a was opened, and (2) the game ball to the large winning opening 53 during the execution of the round game. The game is terminated when one of the conditions of the number of balls entered reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 [balls] in the present embodiment) is satisfied.

When "small hit 1" or "small hit 2"("small hit symbol 1" or "small hit symbol 2") is won, a small hit gaming state occurs. Then, in the small hit game state, the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the large winning opening 53.
Specifically, a predetermined number of small hit games are executed during the occurrence of the small hit game state.
In the present embodiment, when "small hit 1" or "small hit 2" is won, the number of small hit games is set to 1 [times].
Further, when "small hit 1" or "small hit 2" is won, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 53a in each small hit game is a predetermined time (29.0 [s in this embodiment). ]) Is set.
Each small hit game consists of (1) the longest opening time has passed since the special electric accessory 53a was opened, and (2) the game to the large winning opening 53 during the execution of the small hit game. It is terminated when one of the conditions of the number of balls entering the ball reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 [balls] in the present embodiment) is satisfied.
Further, in each small hit game, the distribution means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state. At this time, in each small hit game, the distribution means is non-V in such a manner that the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 53 during the execution of the small hit game can easily (possibly) pass through the V region. It is displaced from the passing state to the V passing state. As a result, when "small hit 1" or "small hit 2" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state.
When the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state (when the passage of the V region by the game ball entered into the large winning opening 53 is detected during the execution of the small hit game) Is generated in the big hit game state according to the end of the small hit game state.
In this case, the number of round games is set to 9 [times]. Further, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 53a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
On the other hand, when the passage of the V region by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state (the passage of the V region by the game ball that entered the large winning opening 53 during the execution of the small hit game is not detected. In the case of), the jackpot game state does not occur.

When the "big hit 1" or the "big hit 3" is won, a predetermined number of time reductions (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is set at the end of the big hit game state.
When "Big hit 2" or "Big hit 4" is won, 0 [times] is set as the number of time reductions at the end of the big hit game state.
In addition, if "small hit 1" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state, the predetermined number of time reductions (this implementation) at the end of the big hit game state. In the form, 1 [times]) is set.
On the other hand, if "small hit 2" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state, the number of time reductions is 0 [times] at the end of the big hit game state. ] Is set.
When 0 [times] is set as the number of time reductions, the time reduction control is not executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, when 1 [times] or more is set as the number of time reductions, the time reduction control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
The time reduction control is started in response to the end of the jackpot game state, and (1) the number of notification displays (variation display and stop display) of the special symbol executed during the time reduction control has reached the set number of time reductions. That, and (2) the next big hit game state is started (the stop display of the "big hit symbol" is finished), and it is finished when one of the conditions is satisfied.

(About control commands)
Next, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 and the control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 will be described.
The main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300, and the communication from the effect control board 300 to the main control board 200 is performed. Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 is composed of 1 byte of upper data indicating the type of control command and 1 byte of lower data indicating the content of the control command. There is.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control board 300 by serial communication. When the effect control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 include a symbol type designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game state designation command, a hold number designation command, and an opening designation. Commands, round start specification command, round end specification command, ending specification command, V prize specification command, look-ahead specification command, error specification command, demo specification command, etc. are set.
The symbol type specification command is a command for specifying the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). Specifically, the symbol type designation commands are "missing symbol", "small hit symbol"("small hit symbol 1" or "small hit symbol 2") and "big hit symbol"("big hit 1 symbol" to "big hit 4". Specify one type of "design"). The symbol type specification command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the symbol type designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The variation pattern specification command is a command that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number). The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The variation pattern specification command is transmitted at the start of the variation display of the special symbol.
The stop designation command is a command for designating a stop display of special symbols (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop specification command is sent at the start of the stop display of the special symbol.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information that specifies the game state. In the present embodiment, as the game state offset value, a numerical value corresponding to each combination of the value of the time saving control flag, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the jackpot is set.
Then, the game state specification command specifies one game state offset value. The game state specification command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the special game phase described later is changed, or the like.

The hold number specification command is a command for specifying the hold number. In the present embodiment, the hold number designation command specifies that the hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has increased by "1", the hold number has decreased by "1", the hold number, and the like. ..
Here, the "special figure 1 hold number" means the number of hold of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device. Further, the "special figure 2 hold number" means the number of hold of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device.
The hold number designation command is transmitted at the time of turning on the power, storing the game information, starting the variable display of the special symbol, and the like. In the present embodiment, as the hold number designation command, a command corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is set.

The opening designation command is a command for designating the start of the opening period (start of the small hit game state or the big hit game state). The opening designation command specifies the type of the small hit game state or the big hit game state (type of "small hit symbol" or "big hit symbol"). Specifically, the opening designation command specifies one type from "small hit symbol 1", "small hit symbol 2", and "big hit symbol 1" to "big hit symbol 4". The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the small hit game state or the big hit game state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round (small hit game or round game). The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a round (small hit game or round game).
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of a round (small hit game or round game). The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round (small hit game or round game).
The ending specification command is a command that specifies the start of the ending period. The ending specification command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.
The V prize designation command is a command for designating the passage of the V region by the game ball. The V prize designation command is transmitted when the game ball detects the passage of the V region.

The look-ahead specification command specifies the type of stop symbol (one of "missing symbol", "small hit symbol 1", "small hit symbol 2", and "big hit symbol 1" to "big hit symbol 4"). Command to do. In the present embodiment, the look-ahead designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The error specification command is a command that specifies the occurrence of various errors. In the present embodiment, the error specification command specifies the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, or a right-handed error. The error specification command is sent when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo specification command is a command that specifies the start of the customer waiting state. The demo specification command is sent at the start of the customer waiting state.

The main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is performed in both directions. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the payout control board 400 by serial communication. When the payout control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Further, the payout control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the payout control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, a prize ball number designation command or the like is set as a control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In the present embodiment, the prize ball number designation command specifies the payout of n (n = 1 to 15) prize balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the prize ball payout operation is executed by the payout control board 400.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200, a payout error occurs / cancels, a full tank error occurs / cancels, a ball jam error occurs / cancels, and the like. Control commands that specify each are set. Each control command is sent when the occurrence / cancellation of various errors is detected.

(Processing executed on the main control board 200)
Next, the process executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the random number generation circuit 203 starts the hard random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, the values of the first loop counter to the third loop counter are within a predetermined range every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 0.083 [μs] in this embodiment). (In the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) is updated by "1".

Further, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is within a predetermined range every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 2.666 [μs] in the present embodiment). In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10066).
Then, the hard random number update process updates the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number, respectively. The hard random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on the software.

Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400. The control command transmission process is started. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on the software.

Next, the game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. 7. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, the initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, the startup program is read from the ROM 220, and the settings necessary for executing various processes such as register settings are performed.

Further, in the initial setting process, the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 are read.
Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read 2 [times], and the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on based on the read result of 2 [times]. Is determined whether or not is occurring. Then, the determination result is saved as the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, when it is determined that the on state has occurred, a value (“1” in the present embodiment) indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, and the on state occurs. If it is determined that the switch information is not set, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred (“0” in the present embodiment) is saved as the switch information.

Further, the reading of the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is executed 2 [times], and the on state is generated for the setting key switch 208 based on the reading result of 2 [times]. Determine if it is. Then, the determination result is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. At this time, when it is determined that the on state has occurred, a value indicating that the on state has occurred (“1” in the present embodiment) is saved as the switch information, and the on state occurs. If it is determined that the switch information is not set, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred (“0” in the present embodiment) is saved as the switch information.

Further, the reading of the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the inner frame opening sensor 108 is executed 2 [times], and the inner frame opening sensor 108 is turned on based on the reading result of 2 [times]. Is determined whether or not is occurring. Then, when it is determined that the on state has not occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value (“0” in the present embodiment) indicating that the on state has not occurred. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state has occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, the wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in the timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the wait processing time set by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed, and if it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the processing of steps S1-3 is repeated.

In step S1-4, the RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, processing necessary for permitting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as the RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.

In step S1-5, the game machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the game machine state flag acquisition process, the game machine state flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the game machine state flag acquisition process, the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is stored (loaded) in the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether or not the backup valid flag is normal, and if it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-7, and the backup valid flag is normal. If it is determined that this is not the case (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, when the value stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 (backup valid flag) is a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal, and the value stored in the backup valid flag area. If is not a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal.

In step S1-7, the checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, the checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
Next, among the backup information, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-18.
Here, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1". When both conditions of "the checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in -7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area" are satisfied. Determine that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1- At least one of the conditions of "the checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in 7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area" is satisfied. If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, the clear target area setting process at power-on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the power-on clear target area setting process, as a range for clearing (initializing) the used area M1 of the RAM 230, other areas (specifically, the checksum area) excluding the set value area and the game machine state flag area. The backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are set.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the ON state has occurred for the RAM clear switch 207, and if it is determined that the ON state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-11. If it is determined that the ON state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state. At this time, if the value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the on state has occurred, and the value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved. If so, it is determined that the on state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the gameable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the game machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the game machine status flag stored in the D register has a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to the game-enabled state, the game is played. Judge that the possible state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and the setting confirmation condition is set. If it is determined that the condition is not established (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is that the game-enabled state has occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been turned on, and the setting key switch 208 has been turned on. This is established when the frame opening sensor 108 is in the ON state.
Here, in step S1-1, when the on state has not occurred for the inner frame opening sensor 108, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the on state has not occurred. As a result, when the on state has occurred for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. .. On the other hand, when the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. Will be done.
Therefore, in step 1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if the value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and the value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved. If it is, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, the setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation status setting process, a value corresponding to the set value confirmation status is set as the game machine status flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, the clear target area setting process is executed when the power is restored, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the clear target area setting process when the power is restored, the set value area, the game machine state flag area, the normal game-related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area are defined as the range for clearing (initializing) the used area M1 of the RAM 230. Areas (specifically, a checksum area, a backup valid flag area, an error-related area, and a normal game-related area 1) are set.
In step S1-15, the initialization process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the initialization process when the power is restored, the range set in steps S1-14 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-16, the subcommand transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the power recovery subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (power recovery specification command) that specifies that the power has been restored from the power cutoff is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-17, the payout command transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when the power is restored, a payout command that specifies that the power has been restored from the power cutoff is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-18, the backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, the unused area read / write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the unused area read / write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read / write check is performed.
In step S1-20, the abnormal clear target area setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the error clear target area setting process, all areas (specifically, set value area, game machine state flag area, checksum area, backup valid flag) are defined as the range for clearing (initializing) the used area M1 of the RAM 230. Area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are set.
In step S1-21, the used area read / write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read / write check process, the range set in steps S1-20 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and the read / write check is performed.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not the result of the read / write check performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 is normal, and when it is determined that the result of the read / write check is not normal (No). , Step S1-23, and if it is determined that the read / write check result is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, the RAM abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.
In steps S1-24, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to steps S1-25 and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred based on the game machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the game machine status flag saved in the D register has a value corresponding to the setting confirmation status, it is determined that the setting confirmation status has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to the setting confirmation status, the setting is made. It is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, the game enable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the game-enabled state setting process, a value corresponding to the game-enabled state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and the setting change condition is set. If it is determined that the condition is not established (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is that the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state, the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in the ON state. It holds in the case.
Here, as described above, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108 are in the ON state, it is indicated that the ON state is generated as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. The value is saved. On the other hand, when the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. Will be done.
Therefore, in step 1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. ..
At this time, if the value indicating that the ON state has occurred is saved for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, the setting change condition is satisfied. Is determined. On the other hand, when at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 has a value indicating that the on state has not occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. Judge that it is not.

In step S1-27, the setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, the game machine state flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the game machine state flag saving process, the game machine state flag set in the D register is saved (saved) in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, the subcommand transmission process at the time of clearing the RAM is executed, and the process proceeds to steps S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (RAM clear specification command) that specifies that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-30, the initialization process at the time of clearing the RAM is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clearing initialization process, the range set in step S1-9 or step S1-20 in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-31, the payout command transmission process at the time of clearing the RAM is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the RAM clear payout command transmission process, the payout command specifying that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-32, the subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the subcommand setting process, the power-on game machine state specification command for specifying the current game machine state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the subcommand setting process, a subcommand output request for the RAM 230 is used to issue a power-on game machine state specification command that specifies the game machine state flag (game machine state) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. Store in the buffer.
In step S1-33, the subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, in the subcommand group, a subcommand for specifying the power recovery phase, a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the firing position, and a stop symbol for the first special symbol are specified. Subcommand to be executed, a subcommand to specify the stop symbol of the second special symbol, a subcommand to specify the number of special figure 1 hold, a subcommand to specify the number of hold of special figure 2, a subcommand to specify the value of the time reduction counter, RAM230 The setting value specification command for specifying the setting value stored in the setting value area of is included.

In step S1-34, the initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
In step S1-35, the interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter / timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initially set.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, the interrupt vector register is set, and the interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main loop processing.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in FIG. 7 is completed, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt disable state that prohibits interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of the power-off save time processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, the initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and the end value of the soft random number (hit symbol random number, fluctuation pattern random number, etc.) which is a random number generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within the range from the preset initial value to the end value. Then, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, the main command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command (control command transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200) received from the payout control board 400 is analyzed, and the process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, the subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, interrupt enable processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. is permitted during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission processing in step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition processing in step S2-1. This is the interrupt enable period.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, the soft random numbers excluding the hit symbol random numbers (specifically, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation processing when power is cut off)
Next, the evacuation process when the power is cut off, which is executed by the CPU 210, will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an evacuation process when the power is cut off.
The main control board 200 includes a power supply cutoff detection circuit (not shown). The power cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600, and outputs a power supply cutoff warning signal to the input port 204 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
Upon receiving the power cutoff warning signal, the CPU 210 starts the power cutoff save process shown in FIG. 9 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop process. The evacuation process when the power is cut off is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the evacuation process when the power is cut off is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the power-off time evacuation process is started, the process first proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the value of the register used during execution of the main loop process is saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, the power cutoff warning signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-3, is the power cutoff warning signal input from the power cutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal)? When it is determined whether or not the power cutoff warning signal is input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and when it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal is not input (No). Goes to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, the output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, the output of the control signal and the control command by the output port 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the values of all the bits included in the port registers of the output port 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) are initialized. As a result, the output of the control signal and the control command by the output port 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
In step S3-5, the backup enable flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is saved in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, the checksum saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum save process, the checksum is calculated and saved.
Specifically, in the checksum storage process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230.
Next, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is saved in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, the RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as the RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, the loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times of reading the power cutoff warning signal is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, the power cutoff warning signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-10, is the power cutoff warning signal input from the power cutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal)? When it is determined whether or not the power cutoff warning signal is input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and when it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal is input (Yes). Goes to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, the loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU When the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S1-1) and it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, the register return process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The clock generation circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
The CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop process in response to the generation of the interrupt request signal. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the process first proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, interrupt enable processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt enable process, interrupts are allowed.
In step S4-3, the dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. The dynamic port output processing will be described later.

In step S4-4, the port input process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input process, the status of each switch sensor (each signal) is acquired.
The RAM 230 has an input information storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), and an input port 204 (input). An on-state storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the port 0 to the input port 3) is provided.
In the port input process, first, for each switch sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the switch sensor is acquired. The acquired information is stored (stored) in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.
As a result, when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level) for each switch sensor, "1" is stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch sensor, and the switch sensor is stored. If the detection signal from the switch sensor is not input (low level), "0" is stored in the input storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.

Next, it is determined whether or not each switch sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3) is in the ON state. At this time, for each switch sensor, the on state is set based on the value saved in the input information storage area in the previous port input process and the value saved in the input information storage area in the current port input process. Determine if it has occurred.
The "on state" means a state in which the detection signal is not input (low level) to a state in which the detection signal is input (high level).
Then, when it is determined that the on state has occurred for each switch sensor, "1" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the switch sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that the on state has not occurred for each switch sensor, "0" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the on-state storage area corresponding to each switch sensor is referred to as “switch bit data” of the switch sensor.
In particular, the input port 1 is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal input from the launchable condition detection unit 422. Then, in the port input process, the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal of the input port 1 is acquired, and the acquired information is stored (stored) in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal. ).

In step S4-5, the game machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the game machine state flag acquisition process, the game machine state flag stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the gameable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, based on the game machine state flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred. At this time, if the acquired game machine status flag is a value corresponding to the gameable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the gameable state, the gameable state is generated. Judge that it is not.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that no abnormal state has occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8 and the abnormal state is changed. If it is determined that it has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred based on the game machine state flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired game machine status flag is a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that the abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired game machine status flag is not a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal status, the RAM abnormal status, and the backup abnormal status, it is determined that the abnormal status has not occurred.

In step S4-8, the setting-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. The setting-related processing will be described later.
In step S4-9, the timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-10, the initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, the hit symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the hit symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the hit symbol random number is updated among the soft random numbers.
In step S4-12, the switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management process, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) according to the state (whether or not the on state is detected) of each switch 101, 102, 104, 110 is executed. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, the special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device and the operation of the special electric accessory 53a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, the normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal figure display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.

In step S4-15, the state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, the occurrence / cancellation of various errors (abnormal states) is monitored. Then, when the occurrence / cancellation of various errors is detected, various settings (subcommand settings, etc.) are executed.
In the state management process, the value saved in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal (the value saved in the previous timer interrupt process and the value saved in the current timer interrupt process) is used. It is determined whether or not the handle detection signal has changed from the non-input state to the input state. Then, when it is determined that the handle detection signal has changed from the state in which it has not been input to the state in which it has been input, the game status specification command for designating the occurrence of the launchable state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Further, in the state management process, it is based on the value saved in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal (the value saved in the previous timer interrupt process and the value saved in the current timer interrupt process). It is determined whether or not the handle detection signal has changed from the input state to the non-input state. Then, when it is determined that the handle detection signal has changed from the input state to the non-input state, the game status specification command for specifying the release of the fireable state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-16, the winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (update of various counters, etc.) according to the state (whether or not the ON state is detected) of each switch 101-103, 105, 106 is executed.

In step S4-17, the payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In the present embodiment, as the prize ball control counter, the prize ball control counter 1 in which the number of ball game balls entered in the large winning opening 53 and the number of ball game balls entered in the right other winning opening 54 are stored. The prize ball control counter 2, the upper left, middle left, lower left, etc. The prize ball control counter 3 that stores the number of ball games that have entered the winning openings 55 to 57, and the ball game balls that have entered the first starting port 51 A prize ball control counter 4 for storing the number of ball games and a prize ball control counter 5 for storing the number of ball games that have entered the second starting port 52 are set.
Then, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (15 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, when the payout control board 400 completes the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command for designating the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (3 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (1 [ball] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, the launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the launch position designation management process, the process related to the designation of the launch position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from a state in which the launch of the game ball to the left route is specified to a state in which the launch of the game ball to the right route is specified (at the start of the jackpot game state, etc.). , "1" is set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230, and the subcommand for designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a subcommand for designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the effect control board 300.
On the other hand, when changing from the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right route to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left route (at the end of the time reduction control, etc.), the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is set to " Set "0".

In step S4-19, the external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In the present embodiment, as external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (electronic device such as a hall computer or a data display device), symbol confirmation count information, start port information, jackpot information, security information, and out port Information on the number of payouts, information on the occurrence of errors, etc. are specified.
The "design fixed number of times information" is external information regarding the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation display and stop display of the special symbol) is executed. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol confirmation count information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time the number of executions of the stop display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number.
The "starting port information" is external information regarding the entry of the game ball into the starting ports 51 and 52. Each time the ON state of the detection signal input from the start port switches 101 and 102 is detected, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the start port information to the hall computer (or data display device).
The "big hit information" is external information regarding the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time a jackpot gaming state occurs.
The "out port payout information" is external information regarding the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the out port 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out-port payout number information to the hall computer every time the value of the out-ball number counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
The "security information" is external information indicating that the setting change state is occurring, the setting confirmation state is occurring, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the fixed number counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the confirmation count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the symbol confirmation count information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the fixed number counter for external information. As a result, the symbol confirmation count information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information start port entry count counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the start port entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the start port information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the start port entry count counter for external information. As a result, the starting port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the jackpot count counter for external information. As a result, the jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the out-ball number counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the out ball count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the out port payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the out-ball number counter for external information. As a result, the out-of-port withdrawal information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state.
Then, it is determined that the value stored in the game machine state flag area is not a value corresponding to the game-enabled state (setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, or backup abnormality state). If it is determined to be a value), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the security timer is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, the LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits). Has been done.
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized) and the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set for each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer, and "0" is set for each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer.

Next, the game machine state flag stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Then, when the acquired game machine state flag is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the normal display data setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the acquired game machine status flag is a value corresponding to the setting change status, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the acquired game machine status flag is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation status, the display data setting process at the time of setting confirmation, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the acquired game machine status flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal status (setting abnormal status, RAM abnormal status, or backup abnormal status), the abnormal time display data setting process described later is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the acquired value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is stored in the common 0 output request buffer. Set.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the first special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 1 to LED8.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the acquired value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the second special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 9 to 16.
Next, the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value of the normal figure display symbol counter is set as the output data a.
Next, the values set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 are the "state before opening the first major winning opening", the "state of controlling the opening of the first major winning opening", and the "state in which the first major winning opening is closed". , "1st big winning opening end wait state", "2nd big winning opening opening state", "2nd big winning opening opening control state", "2nd big winning opening closing effective state" and "2nd big winning opening opening" It is determined whether or not it is a value that specifies any of the special game phases in the "winning opening opening end wait state".
Then, the values set in the special game phase flag area are "the state before the opening of the first big winning opening", "the state of controlling the opening of the first big winning opening", "the state where the closing of the first big winning opening is valid", and "the first". 1st big winning opening end wait state "," 2nd big winning opening opening state "," 2nd big winning opening opening control state "," 2nd big winning opening closing effective state "and" 2nd big winning opening opening open state " When it is determined that any of the special game phases is specified in the "end wait state", the value set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230 (type of "small hit symbol" or "big hit symbol"). The value corresponding to) is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data b.
On the other hand, the values set in the special game phase flag area are "the state before the opening of the first big winning opening", "the state of controlling the opening of the first big winning opening", "the state where the first big winning opening is closed", and "the first". 1st big winning opening end wait state "," 2nd big winning opening opening state "," 2nd big winning opening opening control state "," 2nd big winning opening closing effective state "and" 2nd big winning opening opening open state " If it is determined that the value does not specify any of the special game phases in the "end wait state", the output data b is not set.
Next, the value set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) that is the logical sum of the output data a to the output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the LEDs 17 and 18 display the normal symbol, and the LEDs 19 to 23 perform the number of round games executed during the jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state). Is displayed, and the LED 24 displays the route (left route or right route) at which the game ball should be launched.
Next, the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data d.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data e.
Next, the value of the normal figure hold number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data f.
Next, it is determined whether or not the power is restored.
Then, when it is determined that the power is restored, the value set in the time saving control flag area is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data g.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is not restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data h.
Next, the display data (8 bits) that is the logical sum of the output data d to the output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the special figure 1 hold number is displayed by the LEDs 25 and 26, the special figure 2 hold number is displayed by the LEDs 27 and 28, and the special figure 2 hold number is displayed by the LEDs 29 and 30. The number of holds is displayed, the game state at the time of power recovery (during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure or the occurrence of the low probability state of the normal figure) is displayed by the LED 31, and the current game state (execution of the time saving control) by the LED 32. Medium or stopped) is displayed.

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and is stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." Is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and "-" The display data (8 bits) of is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "r" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 49 to LED56. The characters "-" are displayed, and the numbers indicating the set values are displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64.

In the setting confirmation display data setting process, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and is stored in the set value area of the RAM 230. The information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." Is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the RAM 230 is set. The display data corresponding to the set value stored in the value area is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (the clear value remains).
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "r" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 57 to LED64. A number indicating the value is displayed. The LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormal display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer. At the same time, the error code corresponding to the generated abnormality is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "r." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and an abnormality occurs. The display data (error code) corresponding to the status (setting abnormal status, RAM abnormal status, or backup abnormal status) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (the clear value remains).
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letters "E" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the letters "r." are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and an error occurs by the LEDs 57 to LED64. A number indicating the code is displayed. The LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, the solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (drive data) output to each solenoid 64 to 66 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, the port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, each solenoid 64 to 66, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer. Further, the solenoids 64 to 66 are driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt disable state that prohibits interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of the power-off save time processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, the test signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is a process based on a program for executing the process related to the test specified by the game machine rules. That is, the test signal output process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (big hit game state, time saving control execution state, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-25, the performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26. The performance display device control process will be described later.
In step S4-26, the register return processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the original processing is restored. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 11, first, the process proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, the output data clearing process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clearing process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set as each bit value of the A register.
In step S29-2, the main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 0. As a result, the output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 becomes a low level.

In step S29-3, the performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 4. As a result, the output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 becomes a low level.
In step S29-4, the common selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether or not the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value (“3” in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the common counter.

In step S29-5, the common output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6.
In the common output process, the output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to the output port 1.
That is, when the value of the common counter = "0", the output data in which "COM0" is set to the high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" are set to the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the output data in which "COM1" is set to the high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" are set to the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the output data with "COM2" as the high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" as the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the output data with "COM3" as the high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" as the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".

Further, in the common output process, the output data of the launch permission signal is output to the output port 1.
That is, first, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set).
Then, when it is determined that the playable state has occurred, the output data having the launch permission signal at a high level is output to the output port 1. As a result, a launch permission signal is output.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the playable state has not occurred, the output data having the launch permission signal at the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, the output of the launch permission signal is stopped.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the game is played. Judge that the possible state has not occurred.
In the present embodiment, the output of the launch permission signal is set only when it is determined that the playable state has occurred in the common output process. As a result, the launch permission signal is output only during the occurrence (setting) of the game-enabled state. However, in the common output process, the output of the launch permission signal may be set regardless of the game machine state. With such a configuration, the launch permission signal can be output at all times during the period when the power is turned on to the main control board 200.

In step S29-6, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the gameable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the game is played. Judge that the possible state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, the main display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, the display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. Set.
At this time, when the value of the common counter = "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is common in the LED display setting process (specifically, the normal display data setting process) in step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process. 0 Output request buffer to common 3 Display data set in the output request buffer.

In step S29-8, the main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to the output port 0.
As a result, the data signal ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) becomes the source driver. It is output for 250a.
That is, the display of the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt disable state that prohibits interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of the power-off save time processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, the performance display device output process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). The performance display device output processing will be described later.

In step S29-11, the performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, the display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. Set.
At this time, when the value of the common counter = "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the LED display setting process (specifically, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, the setting confirmation) in step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process. The display data is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the time display data setting process or the abnormal time display data setting process).

In step S29-12, the performance display device data output process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, the data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) is the source driver. It is output for 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. That is, the performance display device output process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, first, as shown in FIG. 12, the process proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register save processing, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area. In addition, all the stack pointer values used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area.

In step S30-2, the performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, the display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, among the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230, the display data set in the area corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register. ..
At this time, when the value of the common counter = "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process in step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt process. It becomes the displayed data.

In step S30-3, the performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, the register return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register return processing, the register value saved in step S30-1 (the value of the register used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the register value in step S30-1 The saved stack pointer value (the stack pointer value used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the saved stack pointer value are restored.
In step S30-5, interrupt enable processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-4). In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, execution of save processing when the power is cut off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Setting-related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, first, as shown in FIG. 13, the process proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2 and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the changed state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine status flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the setting change state, the setting is made. It is determined that the change state has not occurred.

In step S37-2, the set value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the set value acquisition process, the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded), and the acquired set value is stored in the register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4 and the RAM clear switch If it is determined that 207 has not been pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, regarding the RAM clear switch 207, if the ON state has occurred, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if the ON state has not occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed. judge.
In step S37-4, the set value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the set value update process, "1" is added to the set value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (“6” in this embodiment), and the set value stored in the register is predetermined. When it is determined that the value is not less than the setting comparison value of (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and the setting value stored in the register is the predetermined setting comparison. If it is determined that the value is less than the value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, the set value initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the set value initialization process, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is overwritten as the set value stored in the register.
In step S37-7, the set value saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the set value saving process, the set value stored in the register is saved in the set value area of the RAM 230.

In step S37-8, when it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state and it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (it is in the OFF state) (No). Goes to step S37-9, and when it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the process ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). ..
Here, regarding the setting key switch 208, if the on state has occurred, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and if the on state has not occurred, the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. Judge that it is not done.
In step S37-9, the subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, the setting-related end specification command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S37-10, the subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol, and a stop of the second special symbol. Subcommand to specify the symbol, Special Figure 1 Subcommand to specify the number of holds, Special Figure 2 Subcommand to specify the number of holds, Subcommand to specify the value of the time reduction counter, Settings stored in the set value area of RAM 230 A setting value specification command that specifies a value is included.
In step S37-11, the ram set process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). In the ram set process, a game-enabled state is set as the game machine state.
Specifically, as a value in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (game machine state flag), a value corresponding to the game available state is saved (saved).

(Switch management process)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, first, as shown in FIG. 14, the process proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the gate switch 104 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the gate switch 104 is detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2 and the gate If it is determined that the ON state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, the normal drawing start ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal figure starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected (Yes), step S5-3 is performed. If it is determined in S5-4 that the ON state of the start port switch 101 in FIG. 1 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. Special Figure 1 The starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected (Yes), step S5-5 is performed. If it is determined in S5-6 that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.
In step S5-6, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. Special Figure 2 The starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the V area switch 110 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the V area switch 110 is detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-8. If it is determined that the ON state of the V area switch 110 has not been detected (No), a series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S5-8, the V passage detection process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In the V passage detection process, first, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in effect.
The "V valid period" is the period from the start of the first round (small hit game) to the elapse of the large winning opening closing valid time (interval time) after the end of the first round.
Then, when it is determined that the V valid period is in progress, "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the V valid period is not in progress, the process is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In the present embodiment, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 corresponds to the "first large winning opening open control state" or the "first large winning opening closing effective state". If the value is, it is determined that the V prize is valid, and if the value corresponds to another special game phase, it is determined that the V prize is not valid.

(Public figure start ball detection process)
Next, the normal drawing start ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a normal drawing start ball detection process.
When the normal figure start ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the process proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, the normal figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal figure random number acquisition process, a winning random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to a normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter is the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment), and it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is not the upper limit value. In (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), a series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5-). Move to 3).
In step S6-3, the normal figure hold number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the normal figure hold number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the normal figure hold number counter is newly set in the normal figure hold number counter.

In step S6-4, the normal figure random number storage process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal figure random number storage process, the hit random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the normal figure game information storage area of the RAM 230 as the normal figure game information.
The RAM 230 includes a storage area 0 in which the normal map game information during execution of the game is stored, and a normal map game information storage area in which the normal map game information in which the normal map winning determination is held is stored. Has been done.
The Fuzu game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the Fuzu game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (upper → lower) in descending order of priority. Then, as for the Fuzu game information stored in the Fuzu game information storage area, the Fuzu winning determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area having a higher priority.
In the normal figure random number storage process, the hit random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the normal figure game information storage area as the normal figure game information. At this time, the Fuzu game information is stored in the storage area having the highest priority among the vacant storage areas.
That is, when the value of the current number of reserved numbers counter in the normal figure = "1", the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 1. When the value of the current number of reserved numbers counter = "2", the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 2. When the value of the current number counter for the number of reserved figures is "3", the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 3. When the value of the current number of reserved numbers counter is "4", the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 4.

(Special figure 1 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a special drawing 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, first, as shown in FIG. 16, the process proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, the special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the start port entry count counter for external information.
In step S7-2, the hold number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the hold number counter address setting process, the address of the hold number counter is set in the hold number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a special drawing 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, first, as shown in FIG. 17, the process proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, the special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the start port entry count counter for external information.
In step S8-2, the hold number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the hold number counter address setting process, the address of the hold number counter in FIG. 2 is set in the hold number counter address area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special symbol random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 18, first, the process proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, the special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, the special figure pending number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure hold number acquisition process, the value of the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area (special figure 1 hold). Acquire (load) the number or the number reserved in Special Figure 2.

In step S9-3, the special figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special figure random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random number values) such as a big hit random number, a hit symbol random number, a reach group random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) acquired in step S9-2 is the upper limit value, and the number of special figure hold is not the upper limit value. If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of reserved special figures is the upper limit (Yes), a series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S4) is completed. -13 or S5-5).
In the present embodiment, "4" is defined as the upper limit of the number of reservations in Special Figure 1. On the other hand, "1" is specified as the upper limit of the number of reservations in Special Figure 2. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that "4" is specified as the upper limit of the number of reservations in Special Figure 2.
In step S9-5, the special figure hold number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure hold number counter update process, the value set in the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area. A value obtained by adding "1" to the counter is newly set in the special figure hold count counter.

In step S9-6, the special figure random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game) of the RAM 230. It is stored in the information storage area or the special figure 2 game information storage area).
The RAM 230 has a storage area 0 in which special figure game information during game execution is stored, a special figure 1 game information storage area in which start determination is held, and a special figure 1 game information storage area in which start determination is held. It is configured to include the special figure 2 game information storage area.
The special figure 1 game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 1 game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (upper → lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the start determination of the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area having a higher priority.
The special figure 2 game information storage area is configured to include only the storage area 1 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 2 game information.

In the special figure random number storage process, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special figure 1 game information. , Special figure 1 Store in the game information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area having the highest priority among the vacant storage areas.
That is, when the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "1", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "2", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "3", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "4", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.
On the other hand, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special diagram 2 game information as the special diagram 2 game. It is stored in the storage area 1 of the information storage area.

In step S9-7, the hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the hold number specification command setting process, the hold number specification command that specifies that the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, a hold number designation command for designating that the number of special symbol 1 hold has increased by "1". Is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230, and when the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the hold number specification command for specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has increased by "1" is sent to the RAM 230. Stored in the subcommand output request buffer of.

In step S9-8, the pre-determination process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S4-13 or S5-5). In the pre-determination process, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure) stored (stored) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) in step S9-6. 2 Various lottery results are pre-determined based on the game information) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination target game information").
In the present embodiment, various lottery results are preliminarily determined for all game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information).
It should be noted that the game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the big hit game state may be configured so that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed. Further, regarding the special figure 2 game information acquired (stored) while the time saving control is stopped, the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time saving control is not executed. May be configured in which the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the pre-determination process, first, the pre-special figure hit determination process is executed.
In the pre-special symbol hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery (“big hit”, “small hit” or “missing”) is determined (pre-special symbol hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol big hit lottery table in which the big hit value of the special symbol lottery is registered, and a special symbol small hit lottery table in which the small hit value of the special symbol lottery is registered.
In addition, as a special figure small hit lottery table, a special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to special figure 1 game information (first special symbol lottery) and a special figure corresponding to special figure 2 game information (second special symbol lottery) A small hit lottery table and is stored.
In the pre-special figure hit determination process, first, the pre-special figure big hit determination process is executed.
In the advance special figure big hit determination process, the special figure big hit lottery table is read out. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the special figure big hit lottery table read out, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is won (pre-special figure big hit determination).
At this time, if the big hit random number included in the pre-judgment target game information matches the big hit value registered in the special figure big hit lottery table, it is determined that the "big hit" has been won (in the special symbol lottery). The result is judged as a "big hit"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination target game information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "big hit" has not been won.
If it is determined by the advance special figure big hit determination process that the "big hit" has not been won, the advance special figure small hit determination process is then executed.
In the pre-special figure small hit determination process, the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) of the game information subject to pre-judgment is confirmed, and the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the pre-judgment target game information and the read special figure small hit lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "small hit" is won (preliminary special figure small hit determination). ..
At this time, if the big hit random number included in the pre-judgment target game information matches the small hit value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has been won (special). The result of the symbol lottery is judged as a "small hit"). On the other hand, if the big hit random number included in the pre-determination target game information does not match the small hit value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has not been won.
If it is determined by the advance special symbol small hit determination process that the "small hit" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "missing".
At this time, as described above, when the hold type of the pre-judgment target game information is the special figure 1 game information, either "big hit" or "missing" is judged ("small hit" is judged. There is no such thing.
On the other hand, when the hold type of the game information to be pre-determined is the special figure 2 game information, either "big hit" or "small hit" is determined ("missing" is not determined).

In the pre-determination process, the pre-special symbol symbol determination process is then executed. In the pre-special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (pre-special symbol determination).
In the pre-special symbol determination process, when the pre-special symbol hit determination determines "big hit" (winning), the type of "big hit symbol" is determined (pre-special symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "big hit symbol" is registered. Further, as the jackpot symbol lottery table, a first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information and a second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information are stored.
Then, in the first big hit symbol lottery table, "big hit symbol 1" and "big hit symbol 2" are registered as the types of "big hit symbols". On the other hand, in the second big hit symbol lottery table, "big hit symbol 3" and "big hit symbol 4" are registered as the types of "big hit symbol".
Then, in the process of determining the type of the "big hit symbol", when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the read first jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the game information to be determined in advance is the special figure 2 game information, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the second jackpot symbol lottery table read out.

On the other hand, in the pre-special symbol determination process, when the pre-special symbol hit determination determines "small hit" (winning), the type of "small hit symbol" is determined (pre-special symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a small hit symbol lottery table in which correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "small hit symbol"("small hit symbol 1" or "small hit symbol 2") is registered.
Then, in the process of determining the type of the "small hit symbol", the small hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the small hit symbol is determined based on the random number of the winning symbol included in the game information to be determined in advance and the read small hit symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the pre-special symbol determination process, when it is determined as "missing" (lost) by the pre-special symbol hit determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stop symbol (pre-special symbol determination).

In the pre-judgment process, the look-ahead designation command setting process is then executed.
In the look-ahead designation command setting process, the first look-ahead designation command for specifying the type of the stop symbol determined by the pre-special symbol symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special game management process)
Next, the special game management process of step S4-13 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special game management process.
In the present embodiment, the phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") of the game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on the special symbol lottery is referred to as "special figure change waiting state". , "Special figure changing state", "Special figure stop symbol display state", "First big winning opening opening state", "First big winning opening opening control state", "First big winning opening""Closed valid state", "1st big winning opening opening end wait state", "2nd big winning opening opening state", "2nd big winning opening opening control state", "2nd big winning opening opening closed state""Validstate" and "wait state at the end of opening the second prize opening" are stipulated.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the special game phases of "11" is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game.
Then, in the special game management process, the special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, as shown in FIG. 19, first, the process proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, the special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, the special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read out.
In step S10-3, the special game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read out in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state", the special figure change waiting process described later is started, and the "special figure changing state" is started. If the value corresponds to, the special figure changing process described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "special figure stopped symbol display state", the special figure stopped processing described later is started. When the value corresponds to the "state before opening the first large winning opening", the pre-processing for opening the first large winning opening, which will be described later, is started, and the value corresponds to the "first large winning opening opening control state". In that case, the first large winning opening opening control process described later is started, and when the value corresponds to the "first large winning opening closing effective state", the first large winning opening closing effective processing described later is started. If the value corresponds to the "first large winning opening opening end wait state", the first large winning opening opening end waiting process, which will be described later, is started and corresponds to the "second large winning opening opening end state". If the value is, the pre-processing for opening the second major winning opening, which will be described later, is started, and if the value corresponds to the "second major winning opening opening control state", the second major winning opening opening, which will be described later, is opened. When the control process is started and the value corresponds to the "second big winning opening closing effective state", the second big winning opening closing effective processing described later is started, and the "second big winning opening opening end wait state" is started. If the value corresponds to, the second large winning opening opening end wait process, which will be described later, is started.

(Special figure change waiting process)
Next, the special figure change waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special figure change waiting process.
When the special figure fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 20, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not "1" or more (No). Goes to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes), it goes to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is "1" or more, and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes). In step S11-3, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is not “1” or more (No), the process proceeds to step S11-16.

In step S11-3, the special figure pending number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure hold number update process, the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure hold number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more.
Then, when the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more, a value for designating a game based on the special figure 2 game information ("1" in this embodiment) is set as the special symbol discrimination flag setting value. At the same time as setting, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not "1" or more (the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "0"), the special figure 1 game information is set as the special symbol discrimination flag setting value. A value (“0” in the present embodiment) for designating the game based on is set, and “1” is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter.
In step S11-4, the hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the hold number designation command setting process, the hold number designation command that specifies that the special figure hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "1", the hold number specification command for specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "0", the hold number specification command for specifying that the special figure 1 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S11-5, the special symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
Specifically, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "1", the storage content of the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area is shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "0", the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage content of the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage content of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-6, the setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the setting error determination process, the occurrence of a setting error is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is acquired. Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired set value is less than a predetermined set comparison value (“6” in this embodiment).
Then, when it is determined that the acquired set value is not less than the predetermined set comparison value (or more than the predetermined set comparison value), the value in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (game machine state flag) is set to the setting abnormal state. Save the corresponding value. In addition, a subcommand that specifies the occurrence of a setting error is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired set value is less than the predetermined set comparison value, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).

In step S11-7, the special figure hit determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special symbol hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special symbol hit determination).
In the special figure hit determination process, first, the special figure big hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure big hit determination process, the special figure big hit lottery table is read out. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read special figure big hit lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a "big hit" (special). Figure jackpot judgment).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed. Judged as "big hit" (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "big hit" has not been won. To do.
If it is determined by the special figure big hit determination process that the "big hit" has not been won, the special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure small hit determination process, the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to the special symbol determination flag set value is read out. Then, based on the value of the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read special figure small hit lottery table, whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is "small hit". (Special figure small hit judgment).
Specifically, when the value of the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the small hit value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, the special symbol lottery is performed. The result is judged as "small hit" (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the small hit value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, the "small hit" is won. Judge that there is no.
If it is determined by the special symbol small hit determination process that the "small hit" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "missing".

In step S11-8, the special symbol symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Specifically, in the special symbol symbol determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a "big hit" (winning) is determined by the special symbol hit determination.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "big hit symbol" is determined.
For this, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "0", the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read first jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "1", the second big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the second jackpot symbol lottery table read out.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "small hit symbol" is determined.
To do this, the small hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the small hit symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read small hit symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "missing" (lost) by the special symbol hit determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of the stop symbol.
Next, a value corresponding to the type of the determined stop symbol is set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-9, the symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command for specifying the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-10, the special figure stop symbol number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special symbol stop symbol number determination process, the stop symbol number of the special symbol is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the hit symbol random number and the stop symbol number (seg data) is registered.
In addition, as a stop symbol number lottery table, a big hit stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to "big hit", a small hit stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to "small hit", and a defeat stop corresponding to "missing" The symbol number lottery table and is stored.
In addition, as a big hit stop symbol number lottery table, a big hit stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and a big hit time corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) The stop symbol number lottery table and is stored.
In the special figure stop symbol number determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special symbol hit determination, the special symbol determination flag setting value is confirmed, and the jackpot stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read jackpot stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure hit judgment, the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of small hit is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read small hit stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the special figure hit judgment, the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of losing is read. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out stop symbol number lottery table at the time of defeat.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-11, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (type of variation pattern) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed. Then, when the result of the special figure hit determination is "missing" (loss), the special figure fluctuation state determination process at the time of loss, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit" (winning), the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, which will be described later, is executed.

In the special figure change mode determination process at the time of defeat, first, the reach group determination process is executed.
In the reach group determination process, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondence between the reach group random number and the reach group number (type of reach group) is registered.
In addition, as the reach group determination table, the hold type (type of game information stored in the storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information)), the number of holds, and the game state (execution of time reduction control). The reach group judgment table corresponding to each combination of (middle / stopped) and is stored.
In the reach group determination, the special symbol determination flag setting value, the number of holds, and the game state are confirmed, and the reach group determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the reach group number is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read reach group determination table.

Next, in the defeated special figure change mode determination process, the defeated variation pattern determination process is executed.
In the loss pattern determination process, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a variation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the variation pattern number (type of variation variation pattern) is registered.
Further, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, a fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing and a fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of winning are stored.
Further, as the defeated variation pattern determination table, the defeated variation pattern determination table corresponding to each reach group number (for each type of reach group) is stored.
In the defeated variation pattern determination, first, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the defeated variation pattern determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out variation pattern determination table at the time of defeat.

On the other hand, in the winning special figure variation mode determination processing, the winning variation pattern determination process is executed.
In the winning variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
In the winning variation pattern determination process, first, the winning variation pattern determination table is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

In step S11-12, the variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the variation pattern command setting process, the variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) determined in steps S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-13, the special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S11-11 is acquired. Then, the acquired fluctuation time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-14, the special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special figure variation display data setting process, data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special figure display timer.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-15, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-16, the customer waiting setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, the demo designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, the process during the special figure change executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the processing during the change of the special figure.
When the special figure changing process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, first, the process proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure display timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- When the process proceeds to 3 and it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-3, the special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special figure variation display data update process, the data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter.

In step S12-4, the special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is lit (stop display).
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is lit (stop display).

In step S12-5, the special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.
In step S12-6, the stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop specification command setting process, the stop specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the fixed number counter for external information.
In step S12-7, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing while the special figure is stopped)
Next, the special figure stopped processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the processing during the stop of the special figure.
When the special figure stop processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the process proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S13-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S13-2, the time saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-3. In the time saving control management process, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is terminated.
Specifically, in the time saving control management process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0".
Then, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0", "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, the time saving control is stopped.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (is "1" or more), the state in which "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained. As a result, the state in which the time saving control is executed is maintained.

In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not the type of the stop symbol is "big hit symbol", and when it is determined that the type of the stop symbol is "big hit symbol" (Yes), step S13-4 is performed. If it is determined that the type of the stop symbol is not "big hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-9.
In step S13-4, the game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
When it is determined that "1" is set in the time saving control flag area, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the time saving counter, and the time saving of the RAM 230 is shortened. Set "0" in the control flag area. As a result, the time saving control is stopped.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the time saving control flag area, the process proceeds to the next process (step S17-5).
In step S13-5, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for opening / closing control of the special electric accessory 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric service control table corresponding to each type of "big hit symbol". Each special solenoid control table has an opening time, a large winning opening closing effective time, a large winning opening closing time, an ending time, the number of rounds (the number of round games), and opening and closing corresponding to each round (round game). The number of switchings, control data (solenoid control data, and control time data) of the large winning opening solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening / closing switching are specified.
In the special electric service control data setting process, the special electric service control table corresponding to the type of the "big hit symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read, and the read special electric service control table is used as the special electric service control table of the RAM 230. Set in the area.
Next, "0" is set in the special electric service continuous operation count counter.

In step S13-6, the opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-7, the opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command for specifying the type of the "big hit symbol" determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the jackpot count counter for external information.
In step S13-8, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second large winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-9, it is determined whether or not the type of the stop symbol is "small hit symbol", and when it is determined that the type of the stop symbol is "small hit symbol" (Yes), step S13- If it is determined in step 10 that the type of the stop symbol is not "small hit symbol" (it is "missing symbol"), the process proceeds to step S13-14.
In step S13-10, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for opening / closing control of the special electric accessory 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric service control table (for small hits) corresponding to each type of "small hit symbol". Then, on each special solenoid control table (for small hits), the opening time, the large winning opening closing effective time, the large winning opening closing time, the ending time, the number of rounds (the number of small hit games), and each round (small hit) The number of open / close switching corresponding to the winning game), the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the large winning opening solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening / closing switching, and the V region solenoid corresponding to each round (small hit game). 66 control data (solenoid control data and control time data) and the like are specified.
In the special electric service control data setting process, the special electric service control table (for small hits) corresponding to the type of the "small hit symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read out, and the read special electric service control table (small hits) is read out. For) is set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
Next, "0" is set in the special electric service continuous operation count counter.

In step S13-11, the opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-12, the opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-13. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command for specifying the type of the "small hit symbol" determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-13, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the first large winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-14, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Pre-processing for opening the first prize opening)
Next, the first large winning opening pre-opening process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the pre-processing for opening the first large winning opening.
When the first large winning opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 23, first, the process proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S14-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter.
In step S14-3, the round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command that specifies the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, the special electric service opening / closing switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open / close switching count setting process, the open / close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter is read by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. .. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the special electric service open / close switching counter. Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric service winning number counter.
In step S14-5, the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first large winning opening opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(1st Grand Prize Opening Control Process)
Next, the first large winning opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first large winning opening opening control process.
When the first large winning opening opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 24, first, the process proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S16-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Goes to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is “0” (Yes), it goes to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4. The special electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of (Yes) has been reached, the process proceeds to step S16-5, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, the process of ending the large winning opening control is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the large winning opening opening control end process, the solenoid control data that specifies the stop of energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, the large winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the special electric service control table is referred to in the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, and the predetermined large winning opening closing effective time (interval time) is set to the special game timer. Set to.
In step S16-7, the round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end specification command setting process, the round end specification command that specifies the end of the round (small hit game) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first large winning opening closed effective state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Effective processing to close the 1st prize opening)
Next, the first large winning opening closing effective processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an effective process for closing the first prize opening.
When the first large winning opening closing effective process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 25, first, the process proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S17-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter has reached the specified value, and it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S17-9.
Here, with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the number of rounds specified in the special electric service control table is acquired as a specified value and a determination is made.
In step S17-3, it was determined whether or not the value set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 was "1", and it was determined that the value set in the V winning flag area was "1". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-4, and when it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S17-11.

In step S17-4, the game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
When it is determined that "1" is set in the time saving control flag area, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the time saving counter, and the time saving of the RAM 230 is shortened. Set "0" in the control flag area. As a result, the time saving control is stopped.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the time saving control flag area, the process proceeds to the next process (step S17-5).

In step S17-5, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for opening / closing control of the special electric accessory 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric service control table (for big hits) corresponding to each type of "small hit symbol". Then, on each special electric service control table (for big hit), the opening time, the large winning opening closing effective time, the big winning opening closing time, the ending time, the number of rounds (the number of round games), and each round (round games) The number of times of opening / closing switching corresponding to the above, the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the large winning opening solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening / closing switching are specified.
In the special electric service control data setting process, the special electric service control table (for big hit) corresponding to the type of the "small hit symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read out, and the read special electric service control table (for big hit) is read out. Is set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
Next, "0" is set in the special electric service continuous operation count counter.

In step S17-6, the opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-7, the opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-8. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-8, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second large winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-9, the large winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-10. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-10, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the first large winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-11, the ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-12. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-12, the ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-13. In the ending specification command setting process, the ending specification command that specifies the end of the small hit game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-13, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "first large winning opening opening end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Wait processing for the end of opening the first prize opening)
Next, the first large winning opening opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first large winning opening opening end wait processing.
When the first large winning opening opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, first, the process proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S18-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S18-2, the V non-winning designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the V non-winning designation command setting process, the V non-winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S18-3, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Pre-processing for opening the second prize opening)
Next, the second large winning opening pre-opening process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the pre-processing for opening the second prize opening.
When the second large winning opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 27, first, the process proceeds to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S40-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S40-2, the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the special electric service continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter.
In step S40-3, the round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command that specifies the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S40-4, the special electric service opening / closing switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the special electric service open / close switching count setting process, the open / close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter is read by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. .. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the special electric service open / close switching counter.
Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric service winning number counter.
In step S40-5, the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-6. The special electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S40-6, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large winning opening opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(2nd prize opening control process)
Next, the second big winning opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the second large winning opening opening control process.
When the second large winning opening opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 28, first, the process proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S41-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S41-4.
In step S41-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Goes to step S41-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is “0” (Yes), it goes to step S41-5.
In step S41-3, the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. The special electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S41-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of (Yes) has been reached, the process proceeds to step S41-5, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S41-5, the process of ending the large winning opening control is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-6. In the large winning opening opening control end process, the solenoid control data that specifies the stop of energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S41-6, the large winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-7. In the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the special electric service control table is referred to in the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, and the predetermined large winning opening closing effective time (interval time) is set to the special game timer. Set to.
In step S41-7, the round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-8. In the round end specification command setting process, the round end specification command that specifies the end of the round game is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S41-8, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large winning opening closed effective state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Effective processing to close the 2nd prize opening)
Next, the second large winning opening closing effective processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second large winning opening closing effective processing.
When the second large winning opening closing effective process is executed in step S10-3, first, as shown in FIG. 29, the process proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S42-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter has reached the specified value, and it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S42-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S42-6.
Here, with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games specified in the special electric service control table is acquired as a specified value and a determination is made. ..

In step S42-3, the ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-4, the ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-5. In the ending specification command setting process, the ending specification command that specifies the end of the jackpot game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S42-5, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "second large winning opening opening end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-6, the large winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-7. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S42-7, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second large winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Wait processing for the end of opening the second prize opening)
Next, the second large winning opening opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a wait process for opening and ending the opening of the second large winning opening.
When the second large winning opening opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, first, as shown in FIG. 30, the process proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S43-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S43-2, the game state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, first, the type of the stop symbol (“big hit symbol” or “small hit symbol”) is determined.
Then, when it is determined that the type of the stop symbol is "small hit symbol 1", "big hit symbol 1", or "big hit symbol 3", a predetermined number of time reductions (1 [times] in this embodiment) is set. , The time reduction counter is set, and "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, the time saving control is started.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the type of the stop symbol is "small hit symbol 2", "big hit symbol 2", or "big hit symbol 4", a predetermined initial value (0 [times] in this embodiment) is set. , The time reduction counter is set, and the state in which "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained. As a result, the time saving control is not started.
Next, "0" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S43-4, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Special electric service opening / closing switching process)
Next, the special electric service opening / closing switching process in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a special electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 31, first, the process proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S15-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is “0” (Yes), a series of processes is completed and the next process (step S14-6) is completed. , S16-4, S40-6, S41-4).
In step S15-2, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 53a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the solenoid control corresponding to the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the large winning opening solenoid 65 is started based on the set solenoid data, and the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S15-3, the special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the special electric service open / close switching counter is referred to by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Is read. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, the special electric service open / close switching counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4). .. In the special electric service opening / closing switching counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter.

(Normal game management process)
Next, the normal game management process of step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process.
Here, in the present embodiment, as a phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary game phase") of a game (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary game") executed based on the ordinary symbol lottery, "waiting for change in the ordinary figure". "State", "Public figure changing state", "Public figure stop symbol display state", "Public figure electric accessory opening pre-opening state", "Public figure electric accessory opening control state", "Public figure electric accessory closing effective" Seven states are specified: "state" and "normal figure electric accessory opening end wait state".
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (execution) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, first, as shown in FIG. 32, the process proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, the normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, the normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read out.

In step S19-3, the normal game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read out in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state", the normal map fluctuation waiting process described later is started and corresponds to the "normal map changing state". If it is a value, the process during the change of the normal figure, which will be described later, is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "display state of the normal figure stop symbol", the process during the stop of the normal figure, which will be described later, is started. If the value corresponds to the "state", the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory opening control state", the ordinary electric accessory opening control process described later is performed. When it is started and the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory closing effective state", when the normal electric accessory closing effective processing described later is started and the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory opening end wait state". , The normal electric accessory opening end wait process described later is started.

(Waiting for changes in normal map)
Next, the normal map fluctuation waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the normal figure fluctuation waiting process.
When the normal figure fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 33, first, the process proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes). , Step S20-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is not "1" or more (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). To do.

In step S20-2, the process of updating the number of reserved numbers is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the normal figure hold number update process, the normal figure hold number is updated.
Specifically, in the normal figure hold number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the normal figure hold number counter.
Next, the storage area in which the normal game information is stored is shifted. Specifically, the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the normal map game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 2 of the Fuzu game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the Fuzu game information storage area. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 3 of the Fuzu game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the Fuzu game information storage area. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 of the Fuzu game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the Fuzu game information storage area. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 of the Fuzu game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S20-3, the normal figure winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal figure winning judgment process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is judged (normal figure winning judgment).
In the ROM 220, a general drawing winning lottery table in which the winning value of the ordinary symbol lottery is registered is stored. Further, as the regular drawing winning lottery table, a regular drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control and a regular drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the time saving control being stopped are stored.
In the general drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the time saving control being stopped, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability becomes the first probability (1/655536 in the present embodiment). On the other hand, in the normal drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability becomes the second probability (1/1 in the present embodiment) higher than the first probability. ing.
Then, in the normal figure winning determination process, the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0, the normal drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control, and the normal figure winning lottery table. Based on, the normal figure winning judgment is executed.
Specifically, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be "winning" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be "missing" (lost).

In step S20-4, the normal figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) of the normal symbol is determined (normal symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as "hit" (winning) by the normal symbol winning judgment, "normal symbol per symbol" is set as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). judge.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "missing" (lost) by the normal symbol winning determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stopped symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S20-5, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined (normal figure fluctuation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time saving control is stopped, the first type (2.0 in the present embodiment) is used as the normal map fluctuation pattern type (variation pattern number). The type corresponding to the fluctuation time of [s]) is determined.
On the other hand, when the time reduction control is being executed, the second type (in the present embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is used as the type (variation pattern number) of the normal map fluctuation pattern. To judge.

In step S20-6, the normal map fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal map fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in step S20-6 is acquired. Then, the acquired fluctuation time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, the normal map variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the normal map fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal map variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal figure display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
Next, predetermined seg data is set as the seg data corresponding to the normal map display device. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the set seg data is controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during fluctuation of general map)
Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.
When the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 34, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. Then, when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure display timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- When the process shifts to 3 and it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), a series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S21-3, the normal map variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal map fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the normal map variation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the normal map display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, the normal figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired stop symbol number is set as the value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal figure display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is lit (stop display).
In step S21-5, the normal figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal figure stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing while the normal drawing is stopped)
Next, the process of stopping the normal drawing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the processing while the normal drawing is stopped.
When the normal figure stopped processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, first, the process proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S22-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a "normal symbol per symbol", and if it is determined that the stop symbol is not a "normal symbol per symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. Then, when it is determined (Yes) that the stop symbol is a “normal symbol per symbol”, the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-4, the ordinary electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric accessory control data setting process, control data for opening / closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal electric service control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control. Then, in each ordinary electric service control table, the time before the ordinary electric service is opened, the normal electric service closing effective time, the opening end wait time, the number of times of opening / closing switching, and the control data corresponding to each opening / closing switching (solenoid control data, control time). Data) etc. are specified.
In the ordinary electric service control data setting process, the ordinary electric service control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control is read, and the read ordinary electric service control table is stored in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Set.
Next, the number of times of opening / closing switching is read out with reference to the ordinary electric service control table set in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the normal electric service open / close switching counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter.

In step S22-5, the time setting process before opening the normal electric service is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric service opening time setting process, a predetermined normal electric service opening time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory opening state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric accessory opening pretreatment)
Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening pretreatment executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process of the ordinary electric accessory.
When the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment is executed in step S19-3, first, as shown in FIG. 36, the process proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S23-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric service opening / closing switching process)
Next, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a normal electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the normal electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, first, as shown in FIG. 37, the process proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S24-2, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is “0” (Yes), the series of processes is completed and the next process (step S23-3). Or move to S25-4).
In step S24-2, the ordinary electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the ordinary electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric accessory 52a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control data setting process, the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the ordinary electric accessory 52a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, the normal electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the time. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, the normal electric service open / close switching counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is newly set in the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter.

(Normal electric accessory opening control process)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening control process.
When the ordinary electric accessory opening control process is executed in step S19-3, first, as shown in FIG. 38, the process proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S25-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Goes to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is “0” (Yes), it goes to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 37) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (3 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of (Yes) has been reached, the process proceeds to step S25-5, and when it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, the normal electric service release control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric service release control end process, the solenoid control data for designating the power supply stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normally electric accessory 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, the normal electric service closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the ordinary electric service closing effective time setting process, a predetermined ordinary electric service closing effective time is set in the ordinary game timer with reference to the ordinary electric service control table set in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closed effective state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric accessory closure effective processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory closing effective process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory closing effective process.
When the normal electric accessory closing effective process is executed in step S19-3, first, as shown in FIG. 39, the process proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S26-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, the opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the release end wait time setting process, a predetermined release end wait time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric accessory opening end weight processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening end wait process.
When the normal electric accessory opening end wait process is executed in step S19-3, first, as shown in FIG. 40, the process proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S27-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Performance display device control processing)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. That is, the performance display device control process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, the process proceeds to step S38-1 as shown in FIG. 41.
In step S38-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register save processing, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area. In addition, all the stack pointer values used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the gameable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the game is played. Judge that the possible state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, the total outcounter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not it is in a predetermined gaming state, and if it is determined that it is in a predetermined gaming state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5 and it is determined that it is not in a predetermined gaming state. If (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined game state" is a game state in which the time saving control is stopped and the big hit game state is not generated.
In step S38-5, the normal outcounter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is usually added to the value of the out counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the out counter is not normally added.

In step S38-6, the normal prize ball counter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51. Add "3". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. Add "1". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 is detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is the number of winning balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the right other winning opening 54. Add "10". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 has not been detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 is detected, the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the left other winning opening 55 to 57 is added to the value of the normal prize ball counter. "10" is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 has not been detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38-8 If it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In the present embodiment, the reference value = 60000 × n (n = integer). Note that "n" is a value indicating the current section, and "1" is set as an initial value.
In step S38-8, the section update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to the base value buffer 2 of the RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal out counter. Further, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current interval. As a result, the reference value is updated.
In step S38-9, the base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal prize ball counter. Then, the calculated base ratio is stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, the base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, the display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with an identification segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, which of the base ratio of the current section and the base ratio of the previous section is to be displayed is selected.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, the information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and the information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set. Set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. The display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to. The display data corresponding to the ones digit is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the current characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 49 to LED56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and LEDs 57 to LED64 display a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio.

On the other hand, when the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, the information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and the information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set. Set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data (8 bits) of "c" is set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. The display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to. The display data corresponding to the ones digit is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the character "c" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the current characters "c" are displayed by the LEDs 49 to LED56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and LEDs 57 to LED64 display a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio.

In step S38-11, the register return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register return processing, the register value saved in step S38-1 (the value of the register used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the register value in step S38-1. The saved stack pointer value (the stack pointer value used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the saved stack pointer value are restored.
In step S38-12, interrupt enable processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-26). In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, execution of save processing when the power is cut off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Processing executed on the effect control board 300)
Next, the process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.

(Sub CPU initialization process)
First, the sub CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
A reset circuit (not shown) is provided on the effect control board 300. The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the sub CPU initialization process (not shown) in response to the generation of the reset signal by the reset circuit.
In the sub CPU initialization process, the CPU 310 is initialized by initializing various registers, various timers, and the like used by the CPU 310. Next, the effect random number update process for updating various effect random numbers is executed. After that, the effect random number update process is repeatedly executed until various interrupt processes described later are executed.

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control board 200.
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.

(Subtimer interrupt processing)
Next, the subtimer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the subtimer interrupt processing.
The effect control board 300 is configured to include a clock generation circuit. The clock generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the sub-timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 42 at predetermined cycles based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the subtimer interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register save process, the register value is saved in the save area of the DRAM 304.

In step S31-2, the timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, the values of various timers (effect scenario timer, etc.) included in the effect control board 300 are updated. Specifically, predetermined values (values corresponding to predetermined cycles) are added or subtracted from the values of various timers.
In step S31-3, the command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the receive buffer of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, the time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of the effect is managed based on the effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area and the value of the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data.
Specifically, in the time schedule management process, it is determined whether or not there is process data whose start time has come for each effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area. Then, when it is determined that the process data whose start time has arrived exists, each command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, command information related to the display effect (effect start command for specifying the start of the display effect, display priority change command, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area. On the other hand, command information related to the sound effect (such as an effect start command for designating the start of the sound effect) is stored in the sound command buffer area. On the other hand, command information related to the lamp effect (such as an effect start command for designating the start of the lamp effect) is stored in the lamp command buffer area. On the other hand, command information related to the movable body effect (such as an effect start command for designating the start of the movable body effect) is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

In step S31-5, the register reset processing is executed and the subtimer interrupt processing is terminated. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S31-1 is restored.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1 as shown in FIG. 43.
In step S32-1, the set value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the set value command reception process, it is determined whether or not the set value specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the set value designation command has been received, the value corresponding to the set value designated by the set value designation command is stored (set) in the set value storage area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.

In step S32-2, the game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not the game state specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game state designation command has been received, various effect flags are set.
In step S32-3, the hold command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The hold command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, the look-ahead command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. The look-ahead command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-5, the variable command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. The variable command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-6, the stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7. The stop command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-7, the opening command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8. The opening command reception process will be described later.

In step S32-8, the game status command reception process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4).
In the game status command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not the game status specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game status designation command has been received, the game status setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game status designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4) without executing the game status setting process.
In the game status setting process, the game status specification command is analyzed.
Then, when the occurrence of the launchable state is specified by the game status specification command, a value (for example, "1") that specifies that the launchable state is being generated in the game status flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300. ") Is set. In addition, an effect of suggesting (notifying) that a launchable state is being generated is started.
On the other hand, when the release of the launchable state is specified by the game status specification command, a value (for example, "0") that specifies that the launchable state is being released in the game status flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300. ") Is set. In addition, the effect of suggesting (notifying) that the launchable state is being generated ends.

(Hold command reception processing)
Next, the hold command reception process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the hold command reception process.
When the hold command reception process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1 as shown in FIG. 44.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2 and the hold count designation command is executed. If it is determined that the command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the hold number (the hold number has increased by "1"), and the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the hold number. If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and the command for specifying the number of holds does not specify an increase in the number of holds (specifies that the number of holds has decreased by "1"). If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the pending number addition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the hold number.
Then, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 hold number, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 1 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, the normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 1 game information is started.
At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, of the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display area b2, a storage area (storage area 1 to 1) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is stored. The display position corresponding to the storage area 4) is set. Here, the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number specification command specifies an increase in the special figure 2 hold number, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 2 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, the normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (memorized) special figure 2 game information is started.
At this time, a predetermined display position in the reserved symbol display area b3 is set as the display area for displaying the reserved symbol h.

In step S36-4, the hold number subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies the subtraction of the hold number in Special Figure 1.
Then, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 1 hold number, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 1 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2 is shifted (moved).
Specifically, the hold effect corresponding to the hold symbol h displayed in the hold symbol display area b1 is terminated. As a result, the display of the pending symbol h corresponding to the terminated pending effect is terminated.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 1 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b2 (corresponding to the storage area 1). Shift from the display position) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the storage area 1 Shifts to the display position corresponding to.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 to the storage area 2 Shifts to the display position corresponding to.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 to the storage area 3 Shifts to the display position corresponding to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 2 hold number, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 2 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the hold effect corresponding to the hold symbol h displayed in the hold symbol display area b1 is terminated. As a result, the display of the pending symbol h corresponding to the terminated pending effect is terminated.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at a predetermined display position in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b3 (display position corresponding to the storage area 1). Shifts from to to the reserved symbol display area b1.

(Read-ahead command reception processing)
Next, the look-ahead command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead command reception process.
When the look-ahead command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1 as shown in FIG. 45.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the look-ahead designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-2 and the look-ahead designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, the look-ahead information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information specified by the look-ahead designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 as hold information.
A hold information storage area capable of storing hold information is set in the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300. Further, as the reserved information storage area, the first reserved information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 game information storage area of RAM 230) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 game information storage area of RAM 230) ) Corresponds to the second reserved information storage area, and is set.
The first reserved information storage area is configured to include storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing reserved information. Then, in the first reserved information storage area, the reserved information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the storage area 1 of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 2 of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 3 of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 4 of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.
The second reserved information storage area is configured to include the storage area 1 as a storage area in which the reserved information can be stored. Then, in the second reserved information storage area, the reserved information corresponding to the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the storage area 1 of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area.
Each pending information is configured to include symbol information indicating the type of the stopped symbol.

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol (“missing symbol” or “big hit symbol”) designated by the look-ahead designation command is analyzed. Then, the pending information including the symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol is generated. Then, the generated hold information is stored (stored) in the first hold information storage area.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol (“small hit symbol” or “big hit symbol”) specified by the look-ahead designation command is analyzed. Then, hold information including the symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol is generated. Then, the generated hold information is stored (stored) in the second hold information storage area.
In the following description, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as “look-ahead target hold information”. Further, among the hold information stored in the first hold information storage area, the hold information for which the notification display (variable display and stop display) is executed before the look-ahead target hold information is referred to as "advance hold information".

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the look-ahead notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4 and the look-ahead notice effect is performed. If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, “1” is set in the pre-reading advance notice effect flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 while the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading notice effect during flag area.
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5 and the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied (No), a series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, (1) the pre-reading target hold information is the hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information, and (2) the advance hold information of a predetermined number (“1” in this embodiment) or more is stored. All the conditions are that (3) there is no advance hold information indicating the "big hit symbol", (4) the time saving control is stopped, and (5) the big hit gaming state is not occurring. If the condition is satisfied, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied.
It should be noted that the content of the pre-reading notice effect execution condition can be changed as appropriate. That is, as a configuration in which it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied when one or a plurality of the above conditions (1) to (5) are satisfied instead of all the conditions (1) to (5) above. It doesn't matter. Further, the pre-reading notice effect execution condition may include other conditions different from the above conditions (1) to (5).

In step S33-5, the look-ahead notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the look-ahead notice effect lottery process, a look-ahead notice effect lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a pre-reading notice effect lottery table in which the winning value of the pre-reading advance notice effect lottery is registered.
In the look-ahead notice effect lottery process, first, a look-ahead notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the acquired look-ahead notice effect lottery random number and the look-ahead notice effect lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect lottery has been won (Yes), step S33-7 is performed. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect lottery has been lost (No), the series of processes is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step 33-7, the pre-reading notice effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, the content of the look-ahead notice effect (hold notice effect) is selected and set. The look-ahead notice effect (hold notice effect) will be described later.

(Variable command reception processing)
Next, the variable command reception process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the variable command reception process.
When the variable command reception process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received, and if it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2 and the predetermined control command is executed. If it is determined that the command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control command refers to a symbol type designation command and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, the stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, the stop effect number (mode of the stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, the stop effect number (mode of the stop effect) is determined based on the type of the stop symbol specified by the symbol type designation command. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in the stop effect number storage area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.

In step S34-3, the variation effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variation effect determination process, the content of the variation effect is selected and set. The variable effect will be described later.
In step S34-4, the advance notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the advance notice effect determination process, the content of the main advance notice effect is selected and set. The main notice production will be described later.
In step S34-5, the variation effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable effect setting process, the effect scenario data of the variable effect is set.
Specifically, in the variation effect setting process, the effect scenario data corresponding to the content of the variation effect selected in step S34-3 is set in the effect scenario setting area. In addition, the effect scenario data corresponding to the content of the main notice effect determined in step S34-4 is set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the variable effect is started, and the main notice effect is executed at a predetermined timing during the variable effect.

(Stop command reception processing)
Next, the stop command reception process in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, the process proceeds to step S35-1 as shown in FIG. 47.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not the stop designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2 and the stop designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, the stop effect start process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect start process, the content of the stop effect is selected and set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area is acquired, and the effect scenario data corresponding to the acquired stop effect number is read out. Then, the read effect scenario data is set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the stop effect (stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started.

(Opening command reception processing)
Next, the opening command reception process of step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the opening command reception process.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, the process proceeds to step S39-1 as shown in FIG. 48.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2 and the opening designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
In step S39-2, the winning effect setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the winning effect setting process, the content of the winning effect is selected and set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, the winning effect number is selected according to the type of the stop symbol designated by the opening designation command. In addition, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected winning effect number is read out. Then, the read effect scenario data is set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the winning production is started.

(Playability of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the first starting port 51 is a ball entry port (fixed ball entry port) that opens upward, and a game ball can be inserted at all times. As a result, the player can obtain the opportunity of the first special symbol lottery by inserting the game ball into the first starting port 51 regardless of the game state.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, if the pachinko machine 1 wins the ordinary symbol lottery (“normal figure hit”) executed when the game ball passes through the start gate 41, the game ball enters the second start port 52. A game state is created that makes it easier to play. Then, the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery can be obtained by inserting the game ball into the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the game state per normal figure.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won (a "big hit" or a "small hit" is won), a game ball is entered into the big winning opening 53. A specific gaming state (small hit gaming state or big hit gaming state) is generated. Then, the prize ball can be obtained by inserting the game ball into the large prize opening 54 during the occurrence of the specific game state.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning the second special symbol lottery is higher than the probability of winning the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, the probability of winning the first special symbol lottery is 1/319, and the probability of winning the second special symbol lottery is 1/1. As a result, it is more likely that a specific gaming state will occur if the opportunity for the second special symbol lottery is acquired than for the opportunity for the first special symbol lottery, which is advantageous to the player. In other words, it is more advantageous for the player to proceed with the game based on the second special symbol lottery than to proceed with the game based on the first special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, the game states related to the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery (specifically, the probability of winning the "normal symbol hit") are the normal symbol high probability state (the state in which the time reduction control is being executed) and the normal symbol lottery. A low-probability state (a state in which time reduction control is stopped) is defined. Then, during the occurrence of the high-probability state of the normal figure (during the execution of the time-saving control), compared with the occurrence of the low-probability state of the normal figure (during the stop of the time-saving control), the normal symbol lottery is performed to "per the normal figure". The probability of winning is high.
Specifically, the probability of winning the ordinary symbol lottery is low (1/65536 in the present embodiment) during the occurrence of the low probability state of the normal figure. As a result, even if the game ball that has entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, it is unlikely that a game state will occur per normal figure, and it will be difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 52. .. Therefore, it becomes difficult to obtain an opportunity (hold) for the second special symbol lottery.
On the other hand, the probability of winning the ordinary symbol lottery is high (1/1 in this embodiment) during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure. As a result, every time the game ball that has entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, a game state is generated per normal drawing, and the game ball can enter the second start port 52. Therefore, it becomes easy to obtain an opportunity (hold) for the second special symbol lottery.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, as the winning types selected when the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won, the "advantageous winning type" that is advantageous to the player and the player "Unfavorable winning type", which is disadvantageous to pachinko, is stipulated.
The "advantageous winning type" is a winning type in which the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state becomes a high probability state (a winning type in which the time saving control is executed after the end of the specific gaming state). In the present embodiment, "small hit 1", "big hit 1" and "big hit 3" are "advantageous winning types".
The "unfavorable winning type" is a winning type in which the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state is in a low probability state (a winning type in which the time saving control is not executed after the end of the specific gaming state). In the present embodiment, "small hit 2", "big hit 2" and "big hit 4" are "disadvantageous winning types".

As described above, during the occurrence of the low-probability state of the normal figure, the game will proceed with the aim of winning the "advantageous winning type" by the first special symbol lottery in order to shift to the high-probability state of the normal figure. .. That is, the game ball is launched with respect to the left path with the aim of entering the game ball into the first starting port 51.
At this time, if the "advantageous winning type" is won by the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the low probability state of the normal figure, the state shifts to the high probability state of the normal figure after the end of the specific game state. On the other hand, if the "unfavorable winning type" is won by the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the low probability state of the normal figure, the low probability state of the normal figure is generated again after the end of the specific game state. ..
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure, the second special symbol lottery is performed in order to continue the high probability state of the normal figure (the state in which the time saving control is executed) while acquiring the prize ball in the specific game state. The game will proceed with the aim of winning the "advantageous winning type". That is, the game ball is launched with respect to the right path with the aim of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52.
At this time, if the "advantageous winning type" is won by the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure, the high probability state of the normal figure is generated again after the end of the specific game state. To. On the other hand, if the "unfavorable winning type" is won by the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure, the state shifts to the low probability state of the normal figure after the end of the specific game state.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, "1" is defined as the upper limit of the number of reserved special figures 2. As a result, even if the "disadvantageous winning type" is won by the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure, if the number of special figures 2 held is "1" or more, the normal figure After shifting to the low probability state, the held second special symbol lottery is executed.
Then, when the "advantageous winning type" is won by the reserved second special symbol lottery, after the end of the specific game state, the state shifts to the normal figure high probability state (the state in which the time saving control is being executed) again. .. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol lottery that has been held is the "unfavorable winning type", the game will proceed based on the first special symbol lottery after the end of the specific game state.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the advantageous section is started according to the start of the "first hit". Then, when the "disadvantageous winning type" is won by the second special symbol lottery executed when the number of reserved special figures 2 = "0", the advantageous section is terminated according to the end of the specific game state. To.
As a result, as long as the "advantageous winning type" is continuously won by the second special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous section, the advantageous section continues. Therefore, as the number of times the "advantageous winning type" is won in the advantageous section increases, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the advantageous section increases.
Then, in the present embodiment, since "1" is defined as the upper limit of the number of reserved special figures 2, the result of the second special symbol lottery of 2 [times] continuously executed during the advantageous section is determined. In both cases, when the "unfavorable winning type" is selected (when the "unfavorable winning type" is continuously won in the advantageous section), the end of the specific gaming state generated based on the second winning of the "unfavorable winning type". The advantageous section is terminated accordingly.
Here, the "first hit" is a state in which the special figure 2 hold number = "0", a state in which the special game based on the special figure 2 game information is not executed, and a normal figure low probability state is occurring. It is a specific game state that occurs when the "advantageous winning type" is won by the first special symbol lottery executed.
The "advantageous section" is a game section that is advantageous to the player, and in particular, is a section in which it is easy (possible) to proceed with the game based on the second special symbol lottery.
Based on the above, the player proceeds with the game while paying particular attention to whether the result of the second special symbol lottery is the "advantageous winning type" or the "unfavorable winning type" during the advantageous section. Will be done.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, as will be described later, a variable effect of the content that fuels whether the result of the second special symbol lottery is the "advantageous winning type" or the "unfavorable winning type" in the advantageous section. By executing, the interest of the game is improved.

(Various effects performed on pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

(Hold production)
First, the hold effect (hold display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, each game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area and special figure 2 game information storage area) is targeted. The hold effect is executed.
The hold effect is that the notification display (start determination) of the special symbol based on the game information (hereinafter referred to as "hold effect target game information") that is the target of the hold effect is suspended, or the hold effect. It is an effect that suggests (notifies) that the notification display of the special symbol based on the target game information is being executed.
In the hold effect, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target game information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 to b3.

Specifically, in the reserved symbol display area b2, as display positions (display units) on which the reserved symbol h is displayed, there are four storage areas (storage areas 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 game information storage area. The display position corresponding to each is specified.
Further, the reserved symbol display area b3 corresponds to each of the four storage areas (storage areas 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 game information storage area as display positions (display units) on which the reserved symbol h is displayed. The display position to be displayed is specified.
Then, in the hold effect in which the special figure 1 game information is the target reserved effect game information, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2.

That is, during the period in which the reserved effect target game information is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) (after the reserved effect target game information is acquired, the start based on the reserved effect target game information is started. During the period before the execution of the determination), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2.
At this time, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target game information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the hold effect target game information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period in which the hold effect target game information is stored in the storage area 0 (the period from the execution of the start determination based on the hold effect target game information to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the hold effect target game information. In the middle), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1.
On the other hand, in the hold effect in which the special figure 2 game information is the hold effect target game information, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target game information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b3.
That is, during the period in which the reserved effect target game information is stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area (storage area 1) (after the acquisition of the reserved effect target game information and before the execution of the start determination based on the reserved effect target game information). During the period up to), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3.
At this time, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area (storage area 1) in which the reserved effect target game information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period in which the hold effect target game information is stored in the storage area 0 (the period from the execution of the start determination based on the hold effect target game information to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the hold effect target game information. In the middle), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1.

For example, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as special figure 1 game information in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area, and a hold effect targeting the special figure 1 game information is executed. If so, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 of the reserved symbol display area b2 according to the start of the reserved effect.
After that, according to the shift of the storage area for storing the reserved effect target game information from the storage area 3 to the storage area 2, the display area of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is the storage area 3. The display position corresponding to is shifted to the display position corresponding to the storage area 2.
Further, in response to the shift of the storage area for storing the reserved effect target game information from the storage area 2 to the storage area 1, the display area of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is the storage area 2. The display position corresponding to is shifted to the display position corresponding to the storage area 1.
Further, when the storage area for storing the reserved effect target game information is shifted from the special figure 1 game information storage area (storage area 1) to the storage area 0, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is obtained. The display area of h is shifted from the reserved symbol display area b2 (display position corresponding to the storage area 1) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
Then, in response to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the reserved effect target game information, the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information in the reserved symbol display area b1 is terminated, thereby ending the reserved effect. To do.

In the present embodiment, the types of the hold effect are defined as a normal hold effect and a hold notice effect.
The “normal hold effect” is a type of hold effect that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the game information subject to the hold effect.
In the present embodiment, as the type (aspect) of the reserved symbol h, a normal hold and a special hold are defined.
In the normal hold effect, the normal hold is displayed as the hold symbol h corresponding to the game information subject to the hold effect.
In the normal hold effect, the game information subject to the hold effect (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area). It starts according to the above, and ends according to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the reserved effect target game information.

(Hold notice production)
"Hold notice production" is a kind of look-ahead notice production. That is, the hold notice effect is a type of hold effect that suggests the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the predetermined game information by the mode of the hold symbol h corresponding to the game information.
In the following description, the game information that is the target of the hold notice effect will be referred to as the "hold notice target game information". Further, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved advance notice target game information is referred to as "notice target reserved symbol hy".
In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is an effect that suggests the result of the advance special symbol determination based on the game information subject to the hold notice (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit symbol" or a "small hit symbol"). It has become.
In the hold notice effect, a special hold is displayed as the hold symbol hy to be noticed.
In the present embodiment, "blue hold", "green hold", "purple hold", and "red hold" are defined as modes (types) of special hold.
Then, in the hold notice effect, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy changes, and the result of the preliminary determination based on the hold notice target game information (specifically, depending on the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy that is finally displayed). The possibility that a big hit game state may occur) is suggested.
Here, the jackpot expectation of each aspect of the special hold is "red hold", "purple hold", "green hold", "blue hold" (high jackpot expectation → jackpot expectation) in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation. It is stipulated to be low).
The "big hit expectation degree" means the possibility (degree) that a big hit gaming state (or a small hit gaming state) occurs when the aspect is selected.

When the hold notice effect is executed, one or a plurality of hold change triggers and the hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger are set. Then, in the hold notice effect, the mode of the hold symbol hy to be announced changes according to the hold change content corresponding to the hold change trigger each time.
The “holding change trigger” is a trigger for changing the mode of the reserved symbol hy to be notified. In addition, the "pending change content" is a content in which the mode of the reserved symbol hy subject to advance notice is changed.
In the present embodiment, as the hold change trigger, the start time of the variable effect corresponding to each advance hold information, the start time of the variable effect corresponding to the game information subject to the hold notice, and the like are defined. Then, when the hold notice effect is executed, one or a plurality of hold change triggers are set from among these hold change triggers.
In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is executed only for the special figure 1 game information among the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information.

(Variation production)
Next, the variation effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a variation pattern corresponding to the second special symbol lottery. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing variable parts constituting the first half block. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an effect configuration of the latter half block.
In the following description, the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a1 is referred to as a “left symbol”, and the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a2 is referred to as a “middle symbol”. , The first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a3 is referred to as a “right symbol”.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the second effect symbol z2 is variably displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 at all times during the execution of the variation effect.

First, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 game information) will be described.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, in the advantageous section, the variation effect of the content that incites whether the result of the second special symbol lottery is the "advantageous winning type" or the "unfavorable winning type" is executed. Will be done.
That is, the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is composed of three effect blocks (specifically, a common block, a first half block, and a second half block).

The "common block" is an effect block in which a common content effect is set for all the variation effects ("variation pattern 1" to "variation pattern 20" described later) corresponding to the second special symbol lottery. ..
In the present embodiment, "holding storage notification" and "final round notification" are defined as the effects set in the common block.
Then, in the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure (during the execution of the time saving control), the "holding accumulation notification" is executed in the common block.
On the other hand, in the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (the second special symbol lottery that was held) executed during the occurrence of the low probability state of the normal figure (while the time saving control is stopped), in the common block, the "final""Timenotification" is executed.
The "holding storage notification" is an effect of encouraging the saving of the special figure 2 holding number up to the upper limit number ("1" in the present embodiment).
The "final round notification" is an effect of notifying that the advantageous section ends when the result of the second special symbol lottery this time is "unfavorable winning type" (the result of the second special symbol lottery this time is " In the case of "unfavorable winning type", the notification display of the second special symbol this time is an effect of notifying that the notification display will be the final notification display in the advantageous section).

The "first half block" is a production block in which the production of the content that encourages whether the result of the second special symbol lottery is the "advantageous winning type" or the "unfavorable winning type" is set.
As described above, "red symbol" and "green symbol" are defined as the types of the first effect symbol z1 corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.
Specifically, the first effect symbol z1 that displays the identification information "1", the first effect symbol z1 that displays the identification information "3", and the first effect symbol z1 that displays the identification information "5" are identified. The first effect symbol z1 that displays the information "7" and is designated as the "red symbol".
On the other hand, the first effect symbol z1 that displays the identification information "2", the first effect symbol z1 that displays the identification information "4", and the first effect symbol z1 that displays "6" are "green symbols". It is said that.
Then, when the "advantageous winning type"("small hit 1" or "big hit 3") is won by the second special symbol lottery, in the first effect symbol display area a1 to a3, the "special symbol 2 high accuracy symbol" The stop symbol corresponding to "" is displayed as a stop. At this time, in the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol", the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 displays the same identification information in "red". It is a display mode that is aligned with the "design".
On the other hand, when the "unfavorable winning type"("small hit 2" or "big hit 4") is won by the second special symbol lottery, the "special symbol 2 normal symbol" is displayed in the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. The stop symbol corresponding to is displayed as a stop. At this time, in the "special figure 2 normal symbol", the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 displays the same identification information as the "green symbol". It is a display mode that is aligned with.
Therefore, in the first half block, temporary stop display of the first effect symbol z1 is set at least 1 [times] in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Then, depending on the mode (combination) of the first effect symbol z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, the result of the second special symbol lottery may be the "advantageous winning type" or " It has a structure that encourages (suggests) whether it will be a disadvantageous winning type.

In the present embodiment, as the effects set in the first half block, "pseudo fluctuation", "tempai fanning (gase)", "tempai fanning (establishment / front)", "tempai fanning (establishment / back)", "tempai fanning" (Establishment / back / slip) "," Green symbol reach (off) "," Red symbol reach (off) "," Green symbol reach (development) "," Special reach (off) ", etc. are stipulated.
Then, in the first half block, one or a plurality of these effects are selected, and the selected one or a plurality of effects are set.
The "pseudo-variation" is a content in which the temporary stop display of the first effect symbol z1 is executed after the variation display of the first special symbol z1 is executed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. It is a production.
The "variable display" is a display in which the types of the first effect symbol z1 displayed at the lottery result display position are sequentially replaced.
The "lottery result display position" means a position where the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in the stop effect.
The "temporary stop display" is a pseudo stop display. Specifically, the temporary stop display is a display of content in which one type of first effect symbol z1 is continuously moving in a predetermined mode (swing, rotation, etc.) at the lottery result display position. It has become.
The "stop display" is a display of the content that one type of first effect symbol z1 stays in the stopped state at the lottery result display position.
Specifically, in the "pseudo-variation", in each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, after the variation display of the first effect symbol z1 is started, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are first displayed in this order. In the effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed.
In particular, in each "pseudo-variation", the stop symbols corresponding to the "missing symbols" are temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. At this time, as will be described later, the result (winning type) of the second special symbol lottery is suggested by the mode (combination) of the first effect symbol z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Will be done.

"Tempai Tenpai (Gase)" is a production of the content that the reach state is not established after the reach state is established or not.
In the "reach state", the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the two first effect symbols are displayed in the two first effect symbol display areas of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. The mode (combination) of the first effect symbol z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the area is in a state of being included in the "special figure 2 high-accuracy symbol" or the "special figure 2 normal symbol". .. In the present embodiment, the reach state is formed by first displaying the left symbol as a temporary stop and then displaying the right symbol as a temporary stop. During the period when the reach state is formed, the variable display is continued for the middle symbol.
Specifically, in "Tempai fanning (Gase)", first, the left symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first effect symbol display area a1, the two left symbols, the "red symbol" and the "green symbol", are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, in the first effect symbol display area a3, first, it is the same as the left symbol of one of the two left symbols (“red symbol” and “green symbol”) (the left symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the front side). After the right symbol appears and the content that encourages whether or not the appearing right symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed, the content that the appearing right symbol disappears without being temporarily stopped is displayed. Next, the same right symbol as the other left symbol (the left symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the back side) of the two left symbols ("red symbol" and "green symbol") appears, and the appearing right symbol appears. After the display of the content that encourages whether or not the temporary stop is displayed is executed, the display of the content that the appearing right symbol disappears without being temporarily stopped is executed. As a result, "Tempai fanning (Gase)" is a production of content that does not form a reach state.

"Tempai fanning (establishment / front)" is a production of the content that the reach state is established after fanning whether or not the reach state is established.
Specifically, in "Tempai fanning (establishment / front)", the left symbol is first temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first effect symbol display area a1, the two left symbols, the "red symbol" and the "green symbol", are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, in the first effect symbol display area a3, first, it is the same as the left symbol of one of the two left symbols (“red symbol” and “green symbol”) (the left symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the front side). After the right symbol appears and the display of the content that encourages whether or not the appearing right symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, the appearing right symbol is temporarily stopped and the content that the reach state is formed is displayed. Will be executed. As a result, "Tempai fanning (establishment / front)" is an effect of the content that the reach state is formed by the left symbol on the front side of the two left symbols that are temporarily stopped.

"Tempai Tenpai (establishment / back)" is a production of the content that the reach state is established after inciting whether or not the reach state is established.
Specifically, in "Tempai fanning (establishment / back)", first, the left symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first effect symbol display area a1, the two left symbols, the "red symbol" and the "green symbol", are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, in the first effect symbol display area a3, first, it is the same as the left symbol of one of the two left symbols (“red symbol” and “green symbol”) (the left symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the front side). After the right symbol appears and the content that encourages whether or not the appearing right symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed, the content that the appearing right symbol disappears without being temporarily stopped is displayed. Next, the same right symbol as the other left symbol (the left symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the back side) of the two left symbols ("red symbol" and "green symbol") appears, and the appearing right symbol appears. After the display of the content that encourages whether or not is temporarily stopped is executed, the appearing right symbol is temporarily stopped and the content that the reach state is formed is displayed. As a result, "Tempai fanning (establishment / back)" is an effect of the content that the reach state is formed by the left symbol on the back side of the two left symbols that are temporarily stopped.

"Tempai fanning (establishment, back, slip)" is the content that the reach state is established after being overturned after the production of the content that the reach state is not established is executed after fanning whether or not the reach state is established. It is a production of.
Specifically, in "Tempai fanning (establishment / back / slip)", the left symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first effect symbol display area a1, the two left symbols, the "red symbol" and the "green symbol", are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, in the first effect symbol display area a3, first, it is the same as the left symbol of one of the two left symbols (“red symbol” and “green symbol”) (the left symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the front side). After the right symbol appears and the content that encourages whether or not the appearing right symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed, the content that the appearing right symbol disappears without being temporarily stopped is displayed. Next, the same right symbol as the other left symbol (the left symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the back side) of the two left symbols ("red symbol" and "green symbol") appears, and the appearing right symbol appears. After the display of the content that encourages whether or not is temporarily stopped is executed, after the appearing right symbol has passed the lottery result display position, the appearing right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the reach state by the slip display. The content of which is formed is displayed. As a result, "Tempai fanning (establishment / back / slip)" is an effect of the content that the reach state is formed by the left symbol on the back side of the two left symbols that are temporarily stopped.
The "slip display" is a display in which the first effect symbol z1 that has passed the lottery result display position slides into the lottery result display position and is temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Green symbol reach (off)" is an effect that is executed during the formation of the reach state by the "green symbol", and after inciting whether or not "special figure 2 normal symbol" is established, "special figure" The content is such that the formation of "2 normal symbols" is avoided.
Specifically, in the "green symbol reach (off)", the reach effect image corresponding to the "green symbol" was displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol formed the reach state by the "green symbol". Later, the left symbol and the middle symbol different from the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed.
In the reach effect image corresponding to the "green symbol", the same middle symbol ("green symbol") as the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle symbol ("Special symbol 2 normal symbol" is temporarily stopped. It is a production image with contents that inspire (to be displayed).

"Red symbol reach (missing)" is an effect that is executed during the formation of the reach state by "red symbol", and after inciting whether or not "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is established, "special" It is a production that misses the establishment of "Fig. 2 High accuracy symbol".
Specifically, in the "red symbol reach (off)", the reach effect image corresponding to the "red symbol" was displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol formed the reach state by the "red symbol". Later, the left symbol and the middle symbol different from the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed.
In the reach effect image corresponding to the "red symbol", the same middle symbol ("red symbol") as the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle symbol ("special symbol 2 high accuracy symbol" is provisionally displayed. It is a production image of the content that incites (stop display).

"Green symbol reach (development)" is an effect that is executed during the formation of the reach state by "green symbol", and after inciting whether or not "special figure 2 normal symbol" is established, "special figure" 2 The production of the content that avoids the formation of the "normal symbol" is executed, and then the production of the content that develops from the reach state by the "green symbol" to the reach state by the "red symbol" and continues the reach state. It has become.
Specifically, in "green symbol reach (development)", the reach effect image corresponding to the "green symbol" was displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol formed the reach state by the "green symbol". Later, the middle symbol different from the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the left symbol and the right symbol change from the reach state by the "green symbol" to the reach state by the "red symbol", and the middle symbol The variable display is resumed.
As a result, the "green symbol reach (development)" is a production that raises expectations that the "special diagram 2 high-accuracy symbol" will be established after the stop display of the "special diagram 2 normal symbol" is avoided. ..

"Special reach (outside)" is a production that follows "green pattern reach (development)". That is, the "special reach (off)" is an effect executed during the formation of the reach state by the "red symbol", and after inciting whether or not the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is established, the "special reach" is ". It is a production that misses the establishment of "Special Figure 2 High Accuracy Design".
Specifically, in the "special reach (off)", the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed after the special reach effect image is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state by the "red symbol". A medium symbol different from is displayed as a temporary stop.
In the special reach effect image, the same middle symbol ("red symbol") as the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle symbol ("special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is temporarily stopped and displayed). It is a production image of the content that incites.

The "second half block" is an effect block in which an effect of notifying whether the result of the second special symbol lottery is the "advantageous winning type" or the "unfavorable winning type" is set.
In the present embodiment, as the effects set in the latter half block, "pseudo fluctuation", "tempai fanning (establishment / front)", "tempai fanning (establishment / back)", and "tempai fanning (establishment / front / sliding)" , "Tempai fanning (establishment / back / slip)", "green symbol reach (hit)", "red symbol reach (hit)", "red symbol reach (relief / hit)", "green symbol reach (interruption / hit)" ) ”,“ Green pattern reach (development) ”,“ Special reach (win) ”,“ Special reach (relief / hit) ”,“ Re-lottery ”, etc. are stipulated.
Then, in the latter half block, one or a plurality of these effects are selected, and the selected one or a plurality of effects are set.
In addition, "pseudo fluctuation", "tempai fanning (establishment / front)", "tempai fanning (establishment / back)", "tempai fanning (establishment / back / slip)", and "green pattern reach" set in the latter half block The contents of "development)" are "pseudo-variation", "tempai fanning (establishment / front)", "tempai fanning (establishment / back)", "tempai fanning (establishment / back / slip)", which are set in the first half block. It is the same as the content of "Green Design Reach (Development)".

"Tempai fanning (establishment, front, slip)", after inciting whether or not the reach state is established, the production of the content that the reach state is not established is executed, and then it is overturned and the content that the reach state is established It is a production.
Specifically, in "Tempai fanning (establishment / front / slip)", the left symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first effect symbol display area a1, the two left symbols, the "red symbol" and the "green symbol", are temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, in the first effect symbol display area a3, first, it is the same as the left symbol of one of the two left symbols (“red symbol” and “green symbol”) (the left symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the front side). The right symbol appears, and the display of the content that encourages whether or not the appearing right symbol is temporarily stopped is executed. After that, after the appearing right symbol passes the lottery result display position, it appears by slip display. The symbol on the right is temporarily stopped, and the content that forms the reach state is displayed. As a result, "tempai fanning (establishment, front, slip)" is an effect of the content that the reach state is formed by the left symbol on the front side of the two left symbols that are temporarily stopped.

The "green symbol reach (hit)" is an effect that is executed during the formation of the reach state by the "green symbol", and after inciting whether or not the "special figure 2 normal symbol" is established, the "special figure" It is a production of the content that "2 normal design" is established.
Specifically, in the "green symbol reach (hit)", the reach effect image corresponding to the "green symbol" was displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol formed the reach state by the "green symbol". Later, the same middle symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "special diagram 2 normal symbol" is established.
As a result, the "green symbol reach (hit)" is an effect of the content that fails to avoid the "special diagram 2 normal symbol".

"Red symbol reach (hit)" is an effect performed during the formation of the reach state by "red symbol", and after inciting whether or not "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is established, "special" It is a production of the content that "Fig. 2 High accuracy symbol" is established.
Specifically, in the "red symbol reach (hit)", the reach effect image corresponding to the "red symbol" was displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol formed the reach state by the "red symbol". Later, the same middle symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "special diagram 2 high accuracy symbol" is established.
As a result, the "red symbol reach (off)" is a production of the content that succeeds in acquiring the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol".

"Red symbol reach (relief / hit)" is an effect that is executed during the formation of the reach state by "red symbol", and after inciting whether or not "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is established, An effect in which the "special figure 2 high-accuracy symbol" is not established is executed, and then overturned to produce an effect in which the "special figure 2 high-accuracy symbol" is established.
Specifically, in "red symbol reach (relief / hit)", the reach effect image corresponding to the "red symbol" is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state by the "red symbol". After that, the left symbol and the middle symbol different from the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, with the relief effect as an opportunity, the same middle symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, "Special figure 2 high accuracy symbol". "Is established.
As a result, the "red symbol reach (relief / hit)" is a production of the content that succeeds in acquiring the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol".
The "relief effect" is an effect including the displacement of a predetermined movable body and the display of a predetermined relief image.

"Green symbol reach (interruption / hit)" is an effect that is executed during the formation of the reach state by the "green symbol", and is produced after inciting whether or not the "special figure 2 normal symbol" is established. Is interrupted, and after that, the content is such that "Special Figure 2 High Accuracy Design" is established.
Specifically, in "green symbol reach (interruption / hit)", the reach effect image corresponding to the "green symbol" is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state by the "green symbol". Is started, and then the power cutoff effect is executed in the middle of displaying the reach effect image corresponding to the "green symbol", and the "second high probability symbol" is established triggered by the power cutoff effect.
As a result, the "green symbol reach (interruption / hit)" is a production of the content that succeeds in acquiring the "special diagram 2 high accuracy symbol".
The "power cutoff effect" is an effect that reproduces the state in which the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

"Special reach (hit)" is a production that follows "green pattern reach (development)". That is, the "special reach (hit)" is an effect executed during the formation of the reach state by the "red symbol", and after inciting whether or not the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is established, the "special reach (hit)" is ". It is a production of the content that "Special Figure 2 High Accuracy Design" is established.
Specifically, in the "special reach (hit)", the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed after the special reach effect image is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state by the "red symbol". The same medium symbol as is temporarily stopped and displayed, and "Special Figure 2 High Accuracy Symbol" is established.
As a result, the "special reach (hit)" is a production of the content that succeeds in acquiring the "special figure 2 high-accuracy symbol".

"Special reach (relief / hit)" is a production that follows "green pattern reach (development)". That is, the "special reach (hit)" is an effect executed during the formation of the reach state by the "red symbol", and after inciting whether or not the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is established, the "special reach (hit)" is ". An effect in which the "special figure 2 high-accuracy symbol" is not established is executed, and then overturned to produce an effect in which the "special figure 2 high-accuracy symbol" is established.
Specifically, in "special reach (relief / hit)", after the special reach effect image is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state by the "red symbol", the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed. A middle symbol different from the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, triggered by the relief effect, the same middle symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the "special symbol 2 high accuracy symbol" is established.
As a result, the "special reach (relief / hit)" is a production of the content that succeeds in acquiring the "special figure 2 high-accuracy symbol".

The "re-lottery" is an effect that is executed following the establishment of the "special figure 2 normal symbol" or the "special figure 2 high-accuracy symbol". That is, the "re-lottery" is replaced with the established stop symbol ("special figure 2 normal symbol" or "special figure 2 high-accuracy symbol"), and the stop symbol according to the result of the lottery executed again ("special figure 2"). 2 Normal symbol "or" Special 2 high-accuracy symbol ") is established. At this time, the lottery is for the purpose of production, and the lottery is not actually executed.
Specifically, in the "re-lottery", the variable display of the first effect symbol z1 starts again from the state in which the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1. After that, the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed again. As a result, the "special figure 2 normal symbol" or the "special figure 2 high-accuracy symbol" is reestablished in the three first effect symbol display areas a1.
In the present embodiment, "re-lottery" is always executed as the final effect of the latter half block. Therefore, the stop symbol newly established by the "re-lottery" is the stop symbol ("special symbol 2 normal symbol" or "special symbol 2 normal symbol") according to the lottery result of the second special symbol (type of the stop symbol determined by the special symbol determination). Special figure 2 high accuracy symbol ").

Next, a method of selecting and setting the content of the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, in the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information, either "big hit" or "small hit" is determined. Then, when a "big hit" or a "small hit" is determined by the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information, any of "variation pattern 1" to "variation pattern 20" is determined by the special figure variation pattern determination. The fluctuation pattern is selected.
At this time, when the "disadvantageous winning type" is won, any one of "variation pattern 1", "variation pattern 5", "variation pattern 9", "variation pattern 13" and "variation pattern 17" is selected. Is selected.
On the other hand, when the "advantageous winning type" is won, "variation pattern 2" to "variation pattern 4", "variation pattern 6" to "variation pattern 8", "variation pattern 10" to "variation pattern 12", "variation" Any one of "Pattern 14" to "Variation pattern 16" and "Variation pattern 18" to "Variation pattern 20" is selected.

When setting the content of the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, first, the effect content of the common block is selected and set.
As shown in FIG. 49, when "fluctuation pattern 1" to "variation pattern 20" are selected, one of "holding storage notification" and "final round notification" is produced as the effect content of the common block. Is set. At this time, if the high-probability state of the normal figure is occurring (the time saving control is being executed), the "holding storage notification" is set, and the low-probability state of the normal figure is occurring (the time saving control is stopped). In that case, "final notification" is set.

When setting the content of the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, next, the effect content of the first half block is selected and set.
To select and set the production content of the first half block, first select the production time of the first half block.
As shown in FIG. 49, in the present embodiment, when "variation pattern 1" to "variation pattern 4" are selected, "28s pseudo" (28 [s]) is selected as the effect time of the first half block. Will be done.
On the other hand, when "variation pattern 5" to "variation pattern 8" are selected, "56s pseudo" (56 [s]) is selected as the effect time of the first half block.
On the other hand, when "variation pattern 9" to "variation pattern 12" are selected, "84s pseudo (84 [s])" is selected as the effect time of the first half block.
On the other hand, when "variation pattern 13" to "variation pattern 16" are selected, "112s pseudo" (112 [s]) is selected as the effect time of the first half block.
On the other hand, when "variation pattern 17" to "variation pattern 20" are selected, "140s pseudo" (140 [s]) is selected as the effect time of the first half block.

To select and set the effect content of the first half block, next, select and set the effect configuration of the first half block based on the effect time of the selected first half block.
In the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of variable parts are defined as variable parts constituting the first half block. Then, one or a plurality of variable parts among the plurality of variable parts are combined to set the effect configuration of the first half block according to the effect time of the selected first half block.
As shown in FIG. 50, in the present embodiment, "28s pseudo part", "56s pseudo part", and "84s pseudo part" are defined as the types of the variable parts constituting the first half block.
The "28s pseudo-part" is a type of variable part in which an effect configuration for an effect time of 28 [s] is defined. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50A, "28s pseudo part 1" and "28s pseudo part 2" are defined as "28s pseudo part".
In "28s pseudo part 1", it is stipulated that "pseudo fluctuation" is executed 8 [times] as an effect configuration.
In "28s pseudo part 2", it is stipulated that "tempai fanning (gase)" is executed after executing "pseudo variation" 2 [times] as an effect configuration.
The "56s pseudo-part" is a type of variable part in which an effect configuration for an effect time of 56 [s] is defined. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50B, "56s pseudo parts 1" to "56s pseudo parts 5" are defined as "56s pseudo parts".
In "56s Pseudo Parts 1", as a production configuration, "Pseudo-variation" is executed 2 [times], then "Tempai fanning (establishment / front)" is executed, and then "Red pattern reach (off)" is executed. It is stipulated to do.
In "56s Pseudo Parts 2", as a production configuration, after executing "Pseudo-variation" 2 [times], "Tempai fanning (establishment / back)" is executed, and then "Red pattern reach (off)" is executed. It is stipulated to do.
In "56s pseudo part 3", as a production configuration, after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 2 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / back)" is executed, and then "green pattern reach (off)" is executed. It is stipulated to do.
In "56s Pseudo Parts 4", as an effect configuration, after executing "Pseudo-variation" 4 [times], "Tempai fanning (establishment / front)" is executed, and then "Red pattern reach (off)" is executed. It is stipulated to do.
In "56s Pseudo Parts 5", as a production configuration, "Pseudo-variation" is executed 1 [time], then "Tempai fanning (establishment / back, slip)" is executed, and then "red pattern reach (off)" is executed. Is specified to be performed.
The "84s pseudo-part" is a type of variable part in which an effect configuration for an effect time of 84 [s] is defined. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), "84s pseudo part 1" is defined as "56s pseudo part".
In "84s pseudo part 1", as a production configuration, after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 2 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / back)" is executed, and then "green pattern reach (development)" is executed. After that, it is stipulated to carry out a "special reach".

When "28s pseudo" is selected as the production time of the first half block, the production configuration of the first half block is set by combining variable parts so that the total production time is 28 [s].
For example, when "28s pseudo" is selected as the effect time of the first half block, the effect configuration of the first half block can be selected and set by using one of the "28s pseudo parts".
On the other hand, when "56s pseudo" is selected as the production time of the first half block, the production configuration of the first half block is set by combining variable parts so that the total production time is 56 [s].
For example, when "56s pseudo" is selected as the effect time of the first half block, the effect configuration of the first half block can be set by combining two of any "28s pseudo parts". At this time, even if the production configuration of the first half block is set by combining two identical "28s pseudo parts", the production configuration of the first half block is set by combining two different "28s pseudo parts". It doesn't matter which one. Alternatively, by using one of the "56s pseudo parts", the effect configuration of the first half block can be set.
On the other hand, when "84s pseudo" is selected as the production time of the first half block, the production configuration of the first half block is set by combining variable parts so that the total production time is 84 [s].
For example, when "84s pseudo" is selected as the effect time of the first half block, the effect configuration of the first half block can be set by combining three of any "28s pseudo parts". At this time, either by combining the same "28s pseudo parts" to set the production configuration of the first half block, or by combining different "28s pseudo parts", setting the production configuration of the first half block. I do not care. Alternatively, one of the "28s pseudo parts" and one of the "56s pseudo parts" can be combined to set the effect configuration of the first half block. Alternatively, by using one "84s pseudo part", it is possible to set the effect configuration of the first half block.
On the other hand, when "112s pseudo" is selected as the production time of the first half block, the production configuration of the first half block is set by combining variable parts so that the total production time is 112 [s].
For example, when "112s pseudo" is selected as the effect time of the first half block, the effect configuration of the first half block can be set by combining four of any "28s pseudo parts". At this time, either by combining the same "28s pseudo parts" to set the production configuration of the first half block, or by combining different "28s pseudo parts", setting the production configuration of the first half block. I do not care. Alternatively, by combining two of any "56s pseudo parts", the effect configuration of the first half block can be set. At this time, even if the production configuration of the first half block is set by combining two identical "56s pseudo parts", the production configuration of the first half block is set by combining two different "56s pseudo parts". It doesn't matter which one. Alternatively, the production configuration of the first half block can be set by combining any two "28s pseudo parts" and one of any "56s pseudo parts". Alternatively, by combining any one of the "28s pseudo parts" and one "84s pseudo parts", the effect configuration of the first half block can be set.
On the other hand, when "140s pseudo" is selected as the production time of the first half block, the production configuration of the first half block is set by combining variable parts so that the total production time is 140 [s].
For example, when "140s pseudo" is selected as the effect time of the first half block, the effect configuration of the first half block can be set by combining five of any "28s pseudo parts". At this time, either by combining the same "28s pseudo parts" to set the production configuration of the first half block, or by combining different "28s pseudo parts", setting the production configuration of the first half block. I do not care. Alternatively, the effect configuration of the first half block can be set by combining any three "28s pseudo parts" and one of any "56s pseudo parts". Alternatively, one of the "28s pseudo parts" and two of the "56s pseudo parts" can be combined to set the effect configuration of the first half block. Alternatively, one of the "56s pseudo parts" and one "84s pseudo part" can be combined to set the effect configuration of the first half block.

To select and set the effect content of the first half block, next, the effect content of the first half block is selected and set based on the effect configuration of the selected and set first half block.
Specifically, for each "pseudo-variation" included in the effect configuration of the first half block selected and set, the mode of the first effect symbol z1 that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Select and set the combination (hereinafter referred to as "temporary stop symbol").
At this time, the temporary stop symbol in each "pseudo-variation" is selected based on the type of the stop symbol determined by the special symbol determination (specifically, "advantageous winning type" or "disadvantageous winning type"). To As a result, the result of the special symbol lottery (specifically, "advantageous winning type" or "disadvantageous winning type") is suggested by the temporary stop symbol in the "pseudo-variation" included in the first half block.
At this time, when the type of the stopped symbol determined by the special symbol determination is "advantageous winning type", it is compared with the case where the type of the stopped symbol determined by the special symbol determination is "unfavorable winning type". Then, in the multiple "pseudo-variations" included in the first half block, each time included in the first half block so that the frequency (probability) of establishing (appearing) the provisional stop symbol in the mode aligned with the "red symbol" becomes high. You can select and set the temporary stop symbol in the "pseudo-variation" of.
In addition, when the type of the stopped symbol determined by the special symbol determination is "unfavorable winning type", it is compared with the case where the type of the stopped symbol determined by the special symbol determination is "advantageous winning type". Therefore, in the multiple "pseudo-variations" included in the first half block, each time included in the first half block, the frequency (probability) of establishing (appearing) the provisional stop symbol in the form aligned with the "green symbol" is high. Temporary stop symbols in "pseudo-variation" can be selected and set.
In addition, only when the type of the stopped symbol determined by the special symbol determination is the "advantageous winning type", a specific combination (for example, the identification information "3" is displayed in the "pseudo-variation" included in the first half block. Temporary stop symbol of "red symbol" (left symbol), "red symbol" (middle symbol) that displays identification information "7", and "red symbol" (right symbol) that displays identification information "3" is established. Temporary stop symbols in each "pseudo-variation" included in the first half block can be selected and set so that they can (appear).
In addition, only when the type of the stopped symbol determined by the special symbol determination is the "unfavorable winning type", a predetermined combination (for example, the identification information "2" is displayed in the "pseudo-variation" included in the first half block. Temporary stop symbol of "green symbol" (left symbol), "green symbol" (middle symbol) that displays identification information "4", and "green symbol" (right symbol) that displays identification information "6" is established. It is possible to select and set a temporary stop symbol in each "pseudo-variation" included in the first half block so that it can (appear).
This completes the selection and setting of the production content of the first half block.

When setting the content of the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, next, the effect content of the latter half block is selected and set.
To select and set the production content of the second half block, first select the production time of the second half block.
As shown in FIG. 49, in the present embodiment, when "variation pattern 1", "variation pattern 5", "variation pattern 9", "variation pattern 13" or "variation pattern 17" is selected, the latter half. As the block production time, "58s fluctuation-> re-lottery (green symbol)" (58 [s]) is selected.
On the other hand, when "variation pattern 2", "variation pattern 6", "variation pattern 10", "variation pattern 14" or "variation pattern 18" is selected, "58s variation →" is set as the effect time of the latter half block. "Re-lottery (red symbol)" (58 [s]) is selected.
On the other hand, when "variation pattern 3", "variation pattern 7", "variation pattern 11", "variation pattern 15" or "variation pattern 19" is selected, "65s variation →" is used as the effect time of the latter half block. "Re-lottery (red symbol)" (65 [s]) is selected.
On the other hand, when "variation pattern 4", "variation pattern 8", "variation pattern 12", "variation pattern 16" or "variation pattern 20" is selected, "93s variation →" is used as the effect time of the latter half block. "Re-lottery (red symbol)" (93 [s]) is selected.

To select and set the effect content of the second half block, next, the effect configuration of the second half block is selected and set based on the effect time of the selected second half block.
In the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of production configurations are defined as the production configurations of the latter half block. Then, one of the plurality of effect configurations is selected and set according to the effect time of the selected latter half block.
As shown in FIG. 51, in the present embodiment, the types of the effect configuration of the latter half block are "58s variation-> re-lottery (green symbol)", "58s variation-> re-lottery (red symbol)", and "65s variation". → Re-lottery (red symbol) ”and“ 93s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) ”are stipulated.
"58s fluctuation-> re-lottery (green pattern)" has a production configuration in which the production time is 58 [s]. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), "58s fluctuation-> re-lottery (green symbol) 1" is defined as "58s fluctuation-> re-lottery (green symbol)".
In "58s fluctuation → re-lottery (green symbol) 1", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 2 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / back)" is executed, and then "green symbol reach (hit)". After that, it is stipulated that "Special Figure 2 Normal Symbol" is displayed by "Re-lottery".

"58s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red pattern)" has a production configuration in which the production time is 58 [s]. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), as "58s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol)", "58s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol) 1" to "58s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol)". ) 5 ”is specified.
In "58s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 1", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 2 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / back)" is executed, and then "green symbol reach (hit)". Is executed, and then, it is stipulated that the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is displayed by "re-lottery".
In "58s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 2", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 2 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / front)" is executed, and then "red symbol reach (hit)". Is executed, and then, it is stipulated that the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is displayed by "re-lottery".
In "58s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 3", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 2 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / front)" is executed, and then "red symbol reach (relief / hit)". ) ”Is executed, and then the“ special figure 2 high accuracy symbol ”is displayed by“ re-lottery ”.
In "58s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 4", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 1 [time], "tempai fanning (establishment / front / slip)" is executed, and then "red symbol reach (hit)". ) ”Is executed, and then the“ special figure 2 high accuracy symbol ”is displayed by“ re-lottery ”.
In "58s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 5", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 1 [time], "tempai fanning (establishment / front / slip)" is executed, and then "red symbol reach (relief)" is executed.・ It is stipulated that "hit)" is executed, and then "special figure 2 high-accuracy symbol" is displayed by "re-lottery".

"65s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red pattern)" has a production configuration with a production time of 65 [s]. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), "65s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol)" is defined as "65s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol) 1" to "65s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol)". ) 7 ”is specified.
In "65s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 1", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 2 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / back)" is executed, and then "green symbol reach (interruption / hit)" is executed. ) ”Is executed, and then the“ special figure 2 high accuracy symbol ”is displayed by“ re-lottery ”.
In "65s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 2", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 2 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / back)" is executed, and then "red symbol reach (hit)". Is executed, and then, it is stipulated that the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is displayed by "re-lottery".
In "65s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 3", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 2 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / back)" is executed, and then "red symbol reach (relief / hit)". ) ”Is executed, and then the“ special figure 2 high accuracy symbol ”is displayed by“ re-lottery ”.
In "65s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 4", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 1 [time], "tempai fanning (establishment / back / slip)" is executed, and then "red symbol reach (hit)". ) ”Is executed, and then the“ special figure 2 high accuracy symbol ”is displayed by“ re-lottery ”.
In "65s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 5", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 1 [time], "tempai fanning (establishment / back / slip)" is executed, and then "red symbol reach (relief)" is executed.・ It is stipulated that "hit)" is executed, and then "special figure 2 high-accuracy symbol" is displayed by "re-lottery".
In "65s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 6", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 4 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / front)" is executed, and then "red symbol reach (hit)". Is executed, and then, it is stipulated that the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is displayed by "re-lottery".
In "65s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 7", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 4 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / front)" is executed, and then "red symbol reach (relief / hit)" is executed. ) ”Is executed, and then the“ special figure 2 high accuracy symbol ”is displayed by“ re-lottery ”.

"93s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red pattern)" has a production configuration that is 93 [s]. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), as "93s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol)", "93s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol) 1" and "93s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol)" ) 2 ”is stipulated.
In "93s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 1", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 2 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / back)" is executed, and then "green symbol reach (development)". Is executed, then "special reach (hit)" is executed, and then "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is displayed by "re-lottery".
In "93s fluctuation → re-lottery (red symbol) 2", after executing "pseudo fluctuation" 2 [times], "tempai fanning (establishment / back)" is executed, and then "green symbol reach (development)". Is executed, then "special reach (relief / hit)" is executed, and then "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is displayed by "re-lottery".

When "58s fluctuation-> re-lottery (green symbol)" is selected as the production time of the second half block, one of the "58s fluctuation-> re-lottery (green symbol)" is selected and set as the production configuration of the second half block. Will be done.
On the other hand, when "58s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol)" is selected as the production time of the second half block, one of the "58s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol)" is selected as the production configuration of the second half block.・ It is set.
On the other hand, when "65s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol)" is selected as the production time of the second half block, one of the "65s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol)" is selected as the production configuration of the second half block.・ It is set.
On the other hand, when "93s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol)" is selected as the production time of the second half block, one of the "93s fluctuation-> re-lottery (red symbol)" is selected as the production configuration of the second half block.・ It is set.

To select and set the effect content of the second half block, next, the effect content of the second half block is selected and set based on the effect configuration of the second half block selected and set.
Specifically, a temporary stop symbol is selected and set for each "pseudo-variation" included in the effect configuration of the latter half block selected and set.
At this time, the temporary stop symbol in each "pseudo-variation" is selected regardless of the type of the stop symbol determined by the special symbol determination (specifically, "advantageous winning type" or "disadvantageous winning type"). To.
As for the "pseudo-variation" of each time included in the effect configuration of the latter half block, the type of the stop symbol determined by the special symbol determination is the same as the "pseudo-variation" of each time included in the effect configuration of the first half block. Specifically, the temporary stop symbol in each "pseudo-variation" may be selected based on the "advantageous winning type" or the "unfavorable winning type").
With the above, the selection / setting of the production content of the latter half block is completed. As a result, the selection / setting of the content of the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is completed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the variable effect corresponding to each second special symbol lottery, in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, the "special figure 2 normal symbol" or the "special figure 2 normal symbol" or "special figure" The reach state is established in the mode (combination) included in "2 high-accuracy symbols".
At this time, if the player establishes the reach state by the mode included in the "special figure 2 normal symbol" (specifically, the "green symbol"), the "special figure 2 normal symbol" is not established. When the reach state is established by the mode (specifically, the "red symbol") included in the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol", the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is established. It can be strongly desired not to do so.
Therefore, it is possible to repeatedly incite whether the "special figure 2 normal symbol" or the "special figure 2 high accuracy symbol" is determined during each variation production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 game information) will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, in the non-advantageous section, a variable effect of the content that incites whether the result of the first special symbol lottery is a "big hit" or a "missing" is executed.
That is, the variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is composed of two effect blocks (specifically, the first block and the second block).

The "first block" is an effect block in which an effect of the content suggesting whether the result of the first special symbol lottery is "big hit" or "missing" is set.
In the present embodiment, "pseudo-variation 1", "pseudo-variation 2", "pseudo-variation 3", "pseudo-variation 4" and the like are defined as the effects set in the first block.
Then, in the first block, one of these effects is selected, and the selected effect is set.
"Pseudo-variation 1" is an effect of the content in which "pseudo-variation" is executed 1 [time].
The "pseudo-variation 2" is an effect in which the "pseudo-variation" is executed 2 [times].
The "pseudo-variation 3" is an effect of the content in which the "pseudo-variation" is executed 3 [times].
The "pseudo-variation 4" is an effect of the content in which the "pseudo-variation" is executed 4 [times].
In particular, in the first block, the result of the first special symbol lottery (specifically, the jackpot expectation) is suggested by the number of "pseudo-variations" executed. At this time, the higher the number of "pseudo-variations" executed, the higher the expectation of big hits. That is, the jackpot expectation of each production is "pseudo fluctuation 4", "pseudo fluctuation 3", "pseudo fluctuation 2", "pseudo fluctuation 1" (high jackpot expectation → jackpot expectation) in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation. It is stipulated to be low).
The "big hit expectation degree" means the possibility (degree) that a big hit gaming state occurs when the production is selected.

The "second block" is an effect block in which an effect of notifying whether the result of the first special symbol lottery is a "big hit" or a "missing" is set.
In the present embodiment, "no reach", "reach 1", "reach 2", "reach 3" and the like are defined as the effects set in the second block.
Then, in the second block, one of these effects is selected, and the selected effect is set.
"No reach" is a production of the content that the "off-the-shelf symbol" is established without forming the reach state.
"Reach 1" is an effect that is executed during the formation of the reach state, and is an effect that encourages whether or not the "big hit symbol" is established. Specifically, in "reach 1", the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the reach effect image corresponding to "reach 1" is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state. , "Big hit symbol" or "missing symbol" is established.
"Reach 2" is an effect that is executed during the formation of the reach state, and is an effect that encourages whether or not the "big hit symbol" is established. Specifically, in "reach 2", the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the reach effect image corresponding to "reach 2" is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state. , "Big hit symbol" or "missing symbol" is established.
"Reach 3" is an effect that is executed during the formation of the reach state, and is an effect that encourages whether or not the "big hit symbol" is established. Specifically, in "reach 3", the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the reach effect image corresponding to "reach 3" is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state. , "Big hit symbol" or "missing symbol" is established.
Then, the jackpot expectation of each production is "reach 3", "reach 2", "reach 1", "no reach" (high jackpot expectation → low jackpot expectation) in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation. It is stipulated to be.

Next, a method of selecting and setting the content of the variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, in the special symbol symbol determination based on the special diagram 1 game information, either the "big hit symbol" or the "missing symbol" is determined. Further, in the special figure variation pattern determination based on the special figure 1 game information, any variation pattern from "variation pattern 21" to "variation pattern 28" is selected.
At this time, when the "big hit symbol" is determined by the special symbol determination, one of the "variation pattern 21" to "variation pattern 24" is selected.
On the other hand, when the "missing symbol" is determined by the special symbol determination, one of the "variation pattern 25" to "variation pattern 28" is selected.
Then, when the "variation pattern 21" or the "variation pattern 25" is selected, the "pseudo variation 1" is set in the first block.
On the other hand, when "variation pattern 22" or "variation pattern 26" is selected, "pseudo variation 2" is set in the first block.
On the other hand, when "variation pattern 23" or "variation pattern 27" is selected, "pseudo variation 3" is set in the first block.
On the other hand, when "variation pattern 24" or "variation pattern 28" is selected, "pseudo variation 4" is set in the first block.
At this time, as described above, the jackpot expectation of each production is "pseudo fluctuation 4", "pseudo fluctuation 3", "pseudo fluctuation 2", "pseudo fluctuation 1" (big hit) in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation. The fluctuation pattern is selected so that the expectation is high → the jackpot expectation is low).

(Stop production)
Next, the stop effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The stop effect is an effect that is executed while the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
In the stop effect, the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol z2 is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 (predetermined). It is displayed in a display mode indicating a color).
At this time, in the stop effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the stop symbol established by the "re-lottery" is stopped and displayed as it is.

(Main notice production)
Next, the main notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "main notice effect" is an effect executed during the variation effect, and is an effect that suggests the result of the start determination (special figure hit determination, special symbol symbol determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variation effect. It has become.
In the present embodiment, the main notice effect suggests the result of the special symbol determination (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit symbol").
In this embodiment, as the type of the main notice effect, a plurality of types having different effect contents are defined.

(Winning production)
Next, the winning effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The winning effect is an effect executed during the occurrence of a specific gaming state (small hit gaming state or big hit gaming state).
In particular, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "special figure 1 normal symbol" was stopped and displayed while winning the "big hit 1" by the first special symbol lottery. In that case, a promotion effect is executed as a winning effect.
The "promotion production" is a production that suggests (notifies) promotion from the "unfavorable winning type" to the "advantageous winning type". In the present embodiment, the promotion effect is executed during the ending period (during the measurement of the ending time) during the occurrence of the big hit game state.

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
In the pachinko machine 1, the mode of the identification information (first effect symbol z1) that is pseudo-stopped and displayed is determined in the "pseudo-variation" according to the result of the special symbol determination based on the special figure 2 game information. .. Thereby, the result of the special symbol symbol determination based on the special figure 2 game information can be suggested depending on the mode of the identification information that is pseudo-stopped and displayed.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) after the end of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) is suggested by the mode of the identification information that is displayed as a pseudo stop. Will be done.
Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the mode of the identification information that is pseudo-stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the production.

1 Pachinko machine 31 Main image display device 31a Display screen 200 Main control board 300 Production control board

Claims (2)

A display control means for executing variable display of identification information and stop display of identification information according to the result of a hit / fail judgment.
It is provided with a specific game state control means that causes a specific game state according to the result of the winning type determination when the result of the win / fail determination is a specific result.
The display control means can execute a pseudo stop display of the identification information during the variable display of the identification information.
A gaming machine characterized in that the mode of identification information that is pseudo-stopped and displayed is determined according to the result of winning type determination. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein at least the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state is suggested by the mode of the identification information displayed in a pseudo-stop manner.

Images